Download Samsung VP-DC165WI دليل المستخدم

page
1
page
2
page
3
page
4
page
5
page
6
page
7
page
8
page
9
page
10
page
11
page
12
page
13
page
14
page
15
page
16
page
17
page
18
page
19
page
20
page
21
page
22
page
23
page
24
page
25
page
26
page
27
page
28
page
29
page
30
page
31
page
32
page
33
page
34
page
35
page
36
page
37
page
38
page
39
page
40
page
41
page
42
page
43
page
44
page
45
page
46
page
47
page
48
page
49
page
50
page
51
page
52
page
53
page
54
page
55
page
56
page
57
page
58
page
59
page
60
page
61
page
62
page
63
page
64
page
65
page
66
page
67
page
68
page
69
page
70
page
71
page
72
page
73
page
74
page
75
page
76
page
77
page
78
page
79
page
80
page
81
page
82
page
83
page
84
page
85
page
86
page
87
page
88
page
89
page
90
page
91
page
92
page
93
page
94
page
95
page
96
page
97
page
98
page
99
page
100
page
101
page
102
page
103
page
104
page
105
page
106
page
107
page
108
page
109
page
110
page
111
page
112
page
113
page
114
page
115
page
116
page
117
page
118
page
119
page
120
page
121
page
122
page
123
page
124
page
125
page
126
page
127
page
128
Transcript 
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪DVD‬‬
‫)‪VP-DC161(i)/DC161W(i)/DC161WB(i)/DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬‬
‫‪AF‬‬
‫‪CCD‬‬
‫‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻨﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺪﻳﻚ ً‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻔﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ 89/336 CEE‬ﻭ‪ 73/23 CEE‬ﻭ‪.93/68 CEE‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﻭﺇﻻ ﺳﺘﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻨﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻼﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Samsung‬ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﺠﻢ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD+R DL‬‬
‫‪DVD+ReWritable‬‬
‫‪AD68-00993N‬‬
‫‪8/9/2006 3:53:04 PM‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab1-37.indd 1‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪٦ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪٩ ............................................DVD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪٣٠ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ( ‪٣٠ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ(‬
‫))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪٣١ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺭﻧﺔ )ﺻﻮﺕ ﺭﻧﺔ( ‪٣٢ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‬
‫))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪٣٣ .........................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ‪) OSD‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( )‪٣٤ .................................(Language‬‬
‫ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ( ‪٣٥ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪٩ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪١٠ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻒ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪١١ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ‪١٢ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪١٣ .................................................. DVD‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻭﺃﻳﺴﺮ‪١٤ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺃﻳﺴﺮ ‪١٥ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻠﻮﻱ ﻭﺃﻳﻤﻦ ‪١٦ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻭﺳﻔﻠﻲ ‪١٧ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪١٨ ..‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) LCD‬ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ‪ /LCD‬ﻟﻮﻥ ‪٣٦ ....................................... (LCD‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‪٣٧ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪١٩ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪٣٨ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﻤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﻭﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪١٩ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ‪٢٠ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ‪٢١ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ‪٢٥ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪٢٦ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪٢٦ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) QUICK MENU‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ( ‪٢٧ .................................‬‬
‫‪) OSD‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪/‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ‪٢٨ ................‬‬
‫‪) OSD‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪/‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪٢٩ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪) OSD‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪٢٩ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪٣٨ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ‪٣٩ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻪ ‪٤٠ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ‪٤٢ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪٣٦ ........................................‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ‪٤٣ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻭﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪٤٣ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﻨﺘﻬﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺒﺘﺪﺋﻴﻦ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪٤٤ ................................ (EASY.Q‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪٤٥ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪٤٥ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ ﻭﺍﻻﺧﺘﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ )ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎء( ‪٤٦ ...............................‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪8/9/2006 3:53:04 PM‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab1-37.indd 2‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ )‪٤٧ .......................................................................... (BLC‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪٤٨ .................................................................. Color Nite‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ))‪ VP-DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪٤٩ .......................‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ ‪٥٠ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ )ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ( ‪٥٠ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﻏﺎﻟﻖ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ(‪٥١ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪/‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ‪٥٢ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺞ )ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪٥٣ .......................................(AE‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ( ‪٥٥ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ )ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ( ‪٥٧ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ )‪ 16:9‬ﻋﺮﻳﺾ( ‪٥٩ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ )ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ( ‪٦٠ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ )ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ(‪٦١ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ : DVD‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪٦٢ ........‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻳﻘﺼﺪ ﺏ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ؟ ‪٦٢ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ؟ ‪٦٢ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪٦٩ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ(‪٦٩ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪٧٠ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺣﺬﻑ(‪٧١ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ -‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ(‪٧٢ ......................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ -‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ(‪٧٤ .........‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ -‬ﺣﺬﻑ(‪٧٦ .........................‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ -‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ( ‪٧٧ ....................‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪٧٩ ........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ )ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ(‪٧٩ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ )ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪ -‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ(‪٨٠ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ )ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ(‪٨١ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ )ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ( ‪٨٢ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪٨٣ ................................... DVD‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺅﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‪/‬ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ‪٨٣ ......................................DVD‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ )ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ( ‪٨٤ .................................................‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪٦٣ ........................................................ DVD‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪٦٣ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪٦٣ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ( ‪٦٤ .........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪٦٦ ....................................................... (PB‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ )ﺣﺬﻑ( ‪٦٧ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ )ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ( ‪٦٨ ..................................................‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪8/9/2006 3:53:04 PM‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab1-37.indd 3‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪٨٥ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺮﺝ‪/‬ﺩﺧﻞ ‪AV‬‬
‫)‪ VP-DC161i/DC161Wi/DC161WBi/DC163i/DC165Wi/DC165WBi‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪٨٥ .....‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪٨٦ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ‪٨٨ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﻧﺴﺦ( ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ‬
‫)‪ VP-DC161i/DC161Wi/DC161WBi/DC163i/DC165Wi/DC165WBi‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪٨٩ .....‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪٩٠ ..........‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ( )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ(‪٩٠ .......................‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪٩٠ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪٩٠ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪٩٠ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪٩١ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪٩٢ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‪٩٣ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ )‪ (JPEG‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪٩٤ ......................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ )‪٩٥ ........................................................ (JPEG‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ )ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ(‪٩٧ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺣﺬﻑ( ‪٩٨ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ( ‪١٠٠ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ )‪ (MPEG‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪١٠١ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ )‪ (MPEG‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪١٠٢ ............................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪١٠٣ ....................... DVD‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪١٠٤ .................................................‬‬
‫™‪PictBridge‬‬
‫))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪١٠٦ ........‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﻙ – ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ™‪١٠٦ ........................................PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪١٠٦ ................................... (USB‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪١٠٧ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪١٠٧ ............................................‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٠٧ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪١٠٧ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪١٠٨ ........‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪١٠٨ .........................................................USB‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪) USB‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪١١٠ ..................................................(USB‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ‪١١١ .........................................DV Media PRO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‪١١٣ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪١١٣ ................................................................USB‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪١١٤ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪١١٥ ............................................. USB‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ‪١١٥ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ‪١١٦ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ‪١١٦ ..............................................‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪8/9/2006 3:53:05 PM‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab1-37.indd 4‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪١١٧ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪١١٧ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪١٢٢ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪١٢٤ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪١٢٥ ....................................................................‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪8/9/2006 3:53:05 PM‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab1-37.indd 5‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﺤﺬﺭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺑﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺟﻬﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﺠﻬًﺎ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻼﺋﻤًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٣٦‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﻟﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺸﻤﺲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺖ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ )ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﻤﺮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺧﻀﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‬
‫ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴًﺎ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .LCD‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ً‬
‫ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤُﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻤﺴﻚ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ DVD‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪8/9/2006 3:53:06 PM‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab1-37.indd 6‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺱ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ )ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﺒﻪ ﻗﻮﺱ ﻗﺰﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻥ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﻥ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﺛﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﺑﺼﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﻠﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻣﻠﺴﺎء ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺧﺪﻭﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﻔﻔﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ً‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﻫﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ً‬
‫ﺭﺷﺎ ﻣﻀﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﺴﻨﻰ ﻟﻚ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻪ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫)ﺗﺴﺮﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺏ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﺮﻩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ .‬ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﻓﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﻟﺘﺸﺠﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻡ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﻭﺍ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﻜﻮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﻮﺭﺩﻳﻬﻢ ﻭﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﻭﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻋﻘﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪8/9/2006 3:53:07 PM‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab1-37.indd 7‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪DVD‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ )ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٦٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ‪ ١٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﻣُﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﺑﺘﻼﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .DVD‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﻄﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺑﺘﻠﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ ،DVD‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﻓﺄﺣﻴﺎ ًﻧﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺟﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺟﺊ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻜﺜﻒ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﻓﺊ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺘﺎء‪(.‬‬‫ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺭ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻒ‪(.‬‬‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺟﺬﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺟﺎﻫﺰ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ )‪ VP-DC161i/DC161Wi/DC161WBi/DC163i/DC165Wi/DC165WBi‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺷﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻛﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻭﺭﺩ ﺫﻛﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﻤﻨﺘﺞ ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﻳﺘﻪ ﺗﻌﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣُﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﺻﺤﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻷﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻚ ﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺧﻄﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺮﻙ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺷﺮﺍء ﻗﻄﻊ ﻏﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻏﻴﺎﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ؛ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ‪.‬‬
‫‪8/9/2006 3:53:07 PM‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab1-37.indd 8‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺄﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪DVD-RW/+RW/DVD-R/+R DL‬‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺳﻢ )ﺑﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻟﻚ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ٣٣‬ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ‪ USB‬ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪ ١٢٠٠‬ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ١٢٠٠‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻣﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪TFT‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺍ ﻧﺎﺻﻌﺔ ﻭﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻨﺤﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ TFT LCD‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻀﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤُﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ٢٫٧‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫))‪ VP-DC161W(i)/DC161WB(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ )‪(DIS‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻮﺽ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻟﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪8/9/2006 3:53:07 PM‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﺎ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺗﻤﻨﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻈﻬﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ )‪(BLC‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﺽ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ )‪ (BLC‬ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺧﻠﻒ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) Program AE‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪(AE‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) Program AE‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ (AE‬ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ )‪Memory Stick (Duo‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ Memory Stick PRO‬ﻭ‪ MMC‬ﻭ‪.SD‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ‪) OSD‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) OSD‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab1-37.indd 9‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٨) DVD-R / DVD-RW‬ﺳﻢ(‬
‫‪٨) DVD+RW‬ﺳﻢ(‬
‫‪DVD+ReWritable‬‬
‫‪٨) DVD+R DL‬ﺳﻢ( )ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ(‬
‫‪DVD+R DL‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪١٢) CD/DVD‬ﺳﻢ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ٢/١ ٣‬ﺑﻮﺻﺎﺕ )‪ ٨‬ﺳﻢ(‪.‬‬
‫ ‪CD‬‬‫ ‪CD-R‬‬‫ ‪CD-RW‬‬‫ ‪DVD-ROM‬‬‫ ‪) DVD+R‬ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬‫ ‪DVD-RAM‬‬‫ ‪) DVD-R‬ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ(‬‫‪ ‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺮﻥ‪MO، MD، iD، LD ،‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﻦ ﻧﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ‪ .DVD‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺗﺎﻟﻒ!‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﻧﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻓﺸﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻋﻴﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻧﺤﻦ ﻻ ﻧﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻻ ﻧﻘﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﻷﻱ ﻓﺸﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺇﺳﺎءﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪8/9/2006 3:53:08 PM‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab1-37.indd 10‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻒ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٤١‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٨) DVD-R‬ﺳﻢ(‬
‫‪٨) DVD+R DL‬ﺳﻢ(‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪ ١٫٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ‬
‫‪ ٢٫٦‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ‬
‫‪) Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪) Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪٨) DVD-RW‬ﺳﻢ(‬
‫‪) VR‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫‪ ١٫٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ‬
‫‪٨) DVD+RW‬ﺳﻢ(‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫–‬
‫‪ ١٫٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ‬
‫‪ ١٫٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ ‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٤٣‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )‪) Finalize‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء( ( ‪ ‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٨٢‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺠﻼﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ‪ ‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٨٣‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ )‪) Unfinalize‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء(( ‪ ‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٨٤‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪ ‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٧٢‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ )‪) Format‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ(( ‪ ‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٨١‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‪ :X /‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ‪ :- /‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ‪.VR‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD+RW‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻀﻤﻦ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺳﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ‪ /‬ﻣﺴﺠﻼﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﻜﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ‪ /‬ﻣﺴﺠﻼﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ١٢‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻤﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD+RW‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ‪ /‬ﻣﺴﺠﻼﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﻛﻤﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD+RW‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪) Finalize/Unfinalize‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء‪/‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻤﺎ ّ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪8/9/2006 3:53:08 PM‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab1-37.indd 11‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪١‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪  .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٤١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪  .(VR‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٧٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪٥‬‬
‫ﺇﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺅﻩ‬
‫ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ‪ /‬ﻣﺴﺠﻼﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD+RW‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﻛﻤﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ ،DVD‬ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ‪DVD‬‬‫‪DVD-R/+R DL‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ ،DVD‬ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ‪DVD‬‬
‫‪DVD-RW‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫‪VR‬‬
‫‪.DVD-RW VR‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‪ /‬ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ : (VR‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺠﻼﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫‪  .DVD-RW VR‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٨٣‬‬
‫‪8/9/2006 3:53:10 PM‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻀﻤﻮ ًﻧﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺴﺠﻼﺕ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺴﺠﻼﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD+RW‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺴﺠﻼﺕ‬
‫‪ DVD‬ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﻛﻤﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab1-37.indd 12‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ )‪(SB-LSM80‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ )ﻧﻮﻉ ‪(AA-E9‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺻﻮﺕ‪/‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ )‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻭﻟﻠﺴﺎﻋﺔ )ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪(CR2025 :‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫)‪(DV Media PRO‬‬
‫‪ .٩‬ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪ .١٠‬ﺣﻤﺎﻟﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪ .١١‬ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ ٨ DVD-RW‬ﺳﻢ ))‪ VP-DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫)‪(SB-LSM80‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫)ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪(AA-E9‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ )‪(CR2025‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻊ‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫‪ .٩‬ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪ .١٠‬ﺣﻤﺎﻟﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪ .١١‬ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ ٨ DVD-RW‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫‪ .١٢‬ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺣﻤﻞ‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺻﻮﺕ‪/‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫‪ .١٢‬ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺣﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﺪﻯ ﻭﻛﻴﻞ ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪8/9/2006 3:53:11 PM‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab1-37.indd 13‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻭﺃﻳﺴﺮ‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪QUICK MENU‬‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪/‬ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪(OK/‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪ACCESS‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪OPEN‬‬
‫‪ .٩‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪EASY.Q‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪ .١٠‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪TFT LCD‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫))‪ VP-DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ ٥.‬ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‪  ACCESS‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٤٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪  OPEN‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٤٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ))‪ VP-DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٤٩‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪8/9/2006 3:53:12 PM‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪  QUICK MENU‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٧‬‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪/‬ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ (OK/‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ .٩‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪  EASY.Q‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٤٤‬‬
‫‪ .١٠‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪TFT LCD‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab1-37.indd 14‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪MENU‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪) Mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ( )‪(DISC/CARD‬‬
‫))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ‬
‫‪ .٩‬ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ‪USB‬‬
‫))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ .١٠‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﺑﻼﺕ‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺯﺭ ‪MF/AF/MULTI DISP‬‬
‫‪ .١١‬ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ‪DC IN‬‬
‫‪C.NITE/LED LIGHT .٦‬‬
‫))‪ VP-DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪COLOR NITE .٦‬‬
‫))‪ VP-DC161(i)/DC161W(i)/DC161WB(i)/DC163(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ .١٢‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪VOL (-/+‬‬
‫‪ .١٣‬ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪MENU‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪  DISPLAY‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٩‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪) Mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ( )‪(DISC/CARD‬‬
‫))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺯﺭ ‪  MF/AF/MULTI DISP‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٩٥/٥٢‬‬
‫‪C.NITE/LED LIGHT .٦‬‬
‫))‪ VP-DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٤٩‬‬
‫‪COLOR NITE .٦‬‬
‫))‪ VP-DC161(i)/DC161W(i)/DC161WB(i)/DC163(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٤٨‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫‪ .٩‬ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) USB‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ .١٠‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﺑﻼﺕ‬
‫‪8/9/2006 3:53:12 PM‬‬
‫‪ .١١‬ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ‪DC IN‬‬
‫‪ .١٢‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪VOL (-/+‬‬
‫‪ .١٣‬ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫‪Mode‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫>‪<Player Mode‬‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ(‬
‫>‪<Camera Mode‬‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ‪/‬ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ‪/‬ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‬‫‬‫ﺧﻔﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻔﺎء ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫>‪) <M.Player Mode‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ(‬
‫))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab1-37.indd 15‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻠﻮﻱ ﻭﺃﻳﻤﻦ‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪PHOTO‬‬
‫))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻲ ﻛﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪Power‬‬
‫‪ .٩‬ﺣﻤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪PHOTO‬‬
‫))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪١٠٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫‪8/9/2006 3:53:13 PM‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫‪.٩‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪/ON/OFF) Power‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ‬
‫)‪/(Camera‬‬
‫)‪((Player‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab1-37.indd 16‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻭﺳﻔﻠﻲ‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ‪MULTI CARD‬ﺓ))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻏﻄﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺧﻄﺎﻑ ﺣﻤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ‪MULTI CARD‬‬
‫))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎﻑ ﺣﻤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ‬
‫‪8/9/2006 3:53:14 PM‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪SD‬‬
‫‪MMC‬‬
‫‪Memory Stick‬‬
‫‪Memory Stick PRO‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab1-37.indd 17‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪PHOTO .٨‬‬
‫‪ .٩‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪W/T‬‬
‫‪START/STOP .١‬‬
‫‪DISPLAY .٢‬‬
‫‪) / .٣‬ﺗﺨﻄﻲ(‬
‫‪)/ .١٠‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ(‬
‫‪) | .١١‬ﺑﻄﻲء(‬
‫‪Q-MENU .١٢‬‬
‫‪)  .٤‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪)  .٥‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ(‬
‫‪MENU .٦‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ) (‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ) (‪/‬ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ) (‪/‬ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ) (‪OK/‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫‪START/STOP‬‬
‫‪  DISPLAY‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٩‬‬
‫‪) /‬ﺗﺨﻄﻲ(‬
‫‪) ‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪) ‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ(‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ) (‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ) (‪/‬ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ) (‪/‬ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ) (‪OK/‬‬
‫‪8/9/2006 3:53:15 PM‬‬
‫‪  PHOTO .٨‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٩٤‬‬
‫‪ .٩‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪  W/T‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٤٥‬‬
‫‪)/ .١٠‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ(‬
‫‪) | .١١‬ﺑﻄﻲء(‬
‫‪Q-MENU .١٢‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab1-37.indd 18‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﻤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﻭﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﻤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭﻣﺮﻳﺢ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ ]‪ [Zoom‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [Start/Stop‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺣﻤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﻓﺘﺤﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺮﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﻤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﺎﻑ ﺣﻤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻳﺪﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺣﻤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻤﺎﻟﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺣﻤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﻓﺘﺤﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺮﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﻤﺎﻟﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﻤﺎﻟﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺣﻤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫‪8/9/2006 3:53:15 PM‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab1-37.indd 19‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻟﻠﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺬﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﺃﻗﻄﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫[(‪،‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻒ ﺣﻤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ )ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ]‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻇﻔﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺿﻊ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻼءﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ] [ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ]‪ [‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺑﻘﺎء ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺓ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻻ ﻋﺎﺩﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻧﺤﻮ ‪ ٦‬ﺃﺷﻬﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻌﻒ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﺮﻍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪ 12:00 01.1.2006‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ )ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪.(CR2025‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻻ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪8/9/2006 3:53:17 PM‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab1-37.indd 20‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ SB-LSM80‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪) SB-LSM160‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ( ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[Off‬‬
‫ﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ )‪ (AA-E9 TYPE‬ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺟﺎﺭ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ً‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ .DVD‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻭﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻮﻗﻔﻪ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪Power‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪٪٥٠‬‬
‫‪٪٧٥ ~ ٪٥٠‬‬
‫‪٪٩٠ ~ ٪٧٥‬‬
‫‪٪١٠٠ ~ ٪٩٠‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ – ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫>ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ<‬
‫‪8/9/2006 3:53:17 PM‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab1-37.indd 21‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ً‬
‫ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٧٧‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ )‪ ٢٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪SB-LSM80‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ ٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪) SB-LSM160‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ(‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ ٤٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ ﻭ‪١٥‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ ﻭ‪٢٥‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ ﻭ‪٣٥‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪XP‬‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮ ‪ ٥٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫‪XP‬‬
‫‪SP‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ ١٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪SP‬‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ ٥٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪LP‬‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ ٥‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ ٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪LP‬‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ ﻭ‪ ٥‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺴﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪.VP-DC161‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ؛‬
‫ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ )ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪/‬ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪.‬‬‫ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪8/9/2006 3:53:18 PM‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab1-37.indd 22‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃ‪ .‬ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺏ‪ ٪٤٠ ~ ٢٠ .‬ﻣﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ‬
‫ﺟـ‪ ٪٨٠ ~ ٤٠ .‬ﻣﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ‬
‫ﺩ‪ ٪٩٥ ~٨٠ .‬ﻣُﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ )ﺃﺣﻤﺮ(‬
‫ﻫـ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ )ﺗﻮﻣﺾ(‬
‫)ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﻭﻗﺖ(‬
‫ﺃ‬
‫ﺏ‬
‫ﺟـ‬
‫ﺩ‬
‫ﻫـ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‘ﻫـ’ ﻭ ‘ﺩ’‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ’ﻫـ‘‬
‫< ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﻌﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ >‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﺷﻚ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٢‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ )ﺻﻔﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ( ﻭ‪ ١٠٤‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ )‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣٢‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ )ﺻﻔﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻋﻤﺮ ﻭﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣٢‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ )ﺻﻔﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠٤‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫)‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ( ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻓﺄﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﻚ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻀﻐﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺨﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﺮ ﻟﻄﺮﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ )‪ .(-‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻭﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪8/9/2006 3:53:19 PM‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab1-37.indd 23‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٢٢‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻞ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٧٧‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ )‪ ٢٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺑﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.SAMSUNG‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺮﺏ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺩﺍﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻐﻴﺮ ٍ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻻ ﺗﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻳﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪8/9/2006 3:53:19 PM‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab1-37.indd 24‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻧﻮﻋﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ :‬ﻭﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﻭﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻮﻑ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺻﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ )ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ (AA-E9‬ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻭﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪.DVD‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫]‪ [On‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[Off‬‬
‫‪8/9/2006 3:53:19 PM‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪Power‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab1-37.indd 25‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺘﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) [Mode‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) [Mode‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‬
‫)‪ [(Camera‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‬
‫)‪.[(Player‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫>‪<Camera Mode‬‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫>‪<Player Mode‬‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ(‬
‫>‪<M.Player Mode‬‬
‫>‪<M.Cam Mode‬‬
‫)ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ(‬
‫)ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ(‬
‫))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪[Power‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪[Mode‬‬
‫‪(VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/‬‬
‫)‪ DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ :‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻂ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻭﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ )ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ )ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻋﻠﻮﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪8/9/2006 3:53:21 PM‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab1-37.indd 26‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) QUICK MENU‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ]‪.[QUICK MENU‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻮﻻ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻬﻼ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪:‬‬
‫>‪) <Camera Mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫>‪<Player Mode‬‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ(‬
‫>‪) <M.Cam Mode‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ(‬
‫))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫>‪ ) <M.Player Mode‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ(‬
‫))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪) DIS‬ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ(‬
‫‪) Program AE‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪(AE‬‬
‫‪) White Balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫‪) Digital Effect‬ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ(‬
‫‪) Shutter‬ﻏﺎﻟﻖ(‬
‫‪) Exposure‬ﻋﺮﺽ(‬
‫‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٦٠‬‬
‫‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٥٣‬‬
‫‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٥٥‬‬
‫‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٥٧‬‬
‫‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٥١‬‬
‫‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٥١‬‬
‫‪) Delete‬ﺣﺬﻑ(‬
‫‪) Partial Delete‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٦٧‬‬
‫‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٦٨‬‬
‫‪) New Playlist‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ(‬
‫‪) Delete‬ﺣﺬﻑ(‬
‫‪) Edit Playlist‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪) White Balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫‪) Photo Quality‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪) Exposure‬ﻋﺮﺽ(‬
‫‪) Delete‬ﺣﺬﻑ(‬
‫‪) Delete All‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ(‬
‫‪) Protect‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪) Print Mark‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‬
‫‪) Format‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ(‬
‫‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٦٩‬‬
‫‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٧١‬‬
‫‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪٧٧ ~ ٧٢‬‬
‫‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٥٥‬‬
‫‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٩٢‬‬
‫‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٥١‬‬
‫‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٩٨‬‬
‫‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٩٩‬‬
‫‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٩٧‬‬
‫‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪١٠٤‬‬
‫‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪١٠٠‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪) White Balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[QUICK MENU‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺣﺮﻙ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <White Balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺣﺮﻙ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )‪) Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ ‪) Indoor‬ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪) Outdoor‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ( ﺃﻭ ‪) Custom WB‬ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ(( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[QUICK MENU‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪STBY SP 0:00:00 -RW‬‬
‫‪30 min VR‬‬
‫‪DIS‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪Program AE‬‬
‫‪White Balance‬‬
‫‪Digital Effect‬‬
‫‪Shutter‬‬
‫‪Exposure‬‬
‫‪Q.MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪0:00:00 -RW‬‬
‫‪VR‬‬
‫‪30 min VR‬‬
‫‪STBY SP‬‬
‫‪DIS‬‬
‫‪Program AE‬‬
‫‪White Balance Outdoor‬‬
‫‪Digital Effect‬‬
‫‪Shutter‬‬
‫‪Exposure‬‬
‫‪Q.MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪0:00:00 -RW‬‬
‫‪30 min VR‬‬
‫‪STBY SP‬‬
‫>ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ<‬
‫‪8/9/2006 3:53:22 PM‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab1-37.indd 27‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪) OSD‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪/‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫‪.٩‬‬
‫‪.١٠‬‬
‫‪.١١‬‬
‫‪.١٢‬‬
‫‪.١٣‬‬
‫‪.١٤‬‬
‫‪.١٥‬‬
‫‪.١٦‬‬
‫‪.١٧‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻔﺔ ‪ ٥٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٤٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٦٠‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ AE‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٥٣‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٥٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٥٧‬‬
‫‪ 16:9‬ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٥٩‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٥١‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٥١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٣٧‬‬
‫‪ COLOR NITE‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪٤٩~٤٨‬‬
‫‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪١١٠‬‬
‫‪(VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/‬‬
‫)‪ DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٣١‬‬
‫‪(VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/‬‬
‫)‪ DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺣﺠﺐ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ ‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٥٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٤٧‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٤٩‬‬
‫))‪ VP-DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٨١‬‬
‫‪8/9/2006 3:53:24 PM‬‬
‫‪ .١٨‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫‪ .١٩‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ .٢٠‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‬
‫‪ .٢١‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٤٢‬‬
‫‪ .٢٢‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ .٢٣‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٤٥‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٦١‬‬
‫‪ .٢٤‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪/PB‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ‪ PB‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٦٦‬‬
‫‪ .٢٥‬ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪١١٧‬‬
‫‪ .٢٦‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٦٣‬‬
‫‪ .٢٧‬ﺩﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٨٥‬‬
‫‪(VP-DC161i/DC161Wi/DC161WBi/‬‬
‫‪ DC163i/DC165Wi/DC165WBi‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ .٢٨‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٦٤‬‬
‫‪) OSD‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪٢٢ ٢١ ٢٠ ١٩‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪STBY SP 0:00:00 -RW‬‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫‪20 min VR‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪T‬‬
‫‪001‬‬
‫!‪No disc‬‬
‫‪Sepia‬‬
‫‪S.1/50‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪16:9 Wide‬‬
‫‪T‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫‪) OSD‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫‪VR‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ )‪(‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ‪) OSD‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ‪.VP-DC163‬‬
‫‪20‬‬
‫‪12:00 01.JAN.2006‬‬
‫‪Color N. 1/25‬‬
‫‪-RW‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫‪►► SP 0:00:00‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪PB ZOOM 2.0x‬‬
‫‪001‬‬
‫‪AV IN‬‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫!‪No disc‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪12:00 01.JAN.2006‬‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab1-37.indd 28‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪) OSD‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪/‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٩٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ(‬
‫ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ(‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٩٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٩٧‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪١٠٤‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪-‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٩١‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ(‬
‫‪) OSD‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪) OSD‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪600‬‬
‫‪8 min‬‬
‫‪T‬‬
‫‪5/10‬‬
‫‪Slide‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫!‪No memory card‬‬
‫!‪No memory card‬‬
‫‪20‬‬
‫‪12:00 01.JAN.2006‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪100-0005‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪12:00 01.JAN.2006‬‬
‫‪SMOV001.AVI‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪) OSD‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪) OSD‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [DISPLAY‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪) OSD‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪) Date/Time‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٣٧‬‬
‫‪8/9/2006 3:53:25 PM‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab1-37.indd 29‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪/‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪/‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [DISC‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) .[CARD‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫)‪.[(Player‬‬
‫)‪ [(Camera‬ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺣﺮﻙ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <System‬ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ >‪) <Clock Set‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪،[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪ [Joystick(OK‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ >!‪) <Complete‬ﺗﻢ!(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٩‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ )ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ٦‬ﺃﺷﻬﺮ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.12:00 01.1.2006‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪.٢٠٤٠‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪8/9/2006 3:53:26 PM‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪►On‬‬
‫‪►On‬‬
‫‪►English‬‬
‫‪►On‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪Move OK Select‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪01 JAN 2006‬‬
‫‪12 : 00‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪Camera Mode‬‬
‫‪►System‬‬
‫‪Clock Set‬‬
‫‪Remote‬‬
‫‪Beep Sound‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪Demonstration‬‬
‫‪Adjust OK Select‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪01 JAN 2006‬‬
‫‪12 : 00‬‬
‫!‪Complete‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪Camera Mode‬‬
‫‪►System‬‬
‫‪Clock Set‬‬
‫‪Remote‬‬
‫‪Beep Sound‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪Demonstration‬‬
‫‪Camera Mode‬‬
‫‪►System‬‬
‫‪Clock Set‬‬
‫‪Remote‬‬
‫‪Beep Sound‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪Demonstration‬‬
‫‪Move OK Select‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab1-37.indd 30‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ( ))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪/‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪/‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [DISC‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) .[CARD‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‬
‫)‪ [(Camera‬ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫)‪.[(Player‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪►On‬‬
‫‪►On‬‬
‫‪►English‬‬
‫‪►On‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺣﺮﻙ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <System‬ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺣﺮﻙ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ >‪) <Remote‬ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺣﺮﻙ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺃﻭ >‪) <Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ )‬
‫( ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ٣‬‬
‫‪8/9/2006 3:53:27 PM‬‬
‫‪Move OK Select‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪On‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪Camera Mode‬‬
‫‪►System‬‬
‫‪Clock Set‬‬
‫‪Remote‬‬
‫‪Beep Sound‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪Demonstration‬‬
‫‪Camera Mode‬‬
‫‪►System‬‬
‫‪Clock Set‬‬
‫‪Remote‬‬
‫‪Beep Sound‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪Demonstration‬‬
‫‪Move OK Select‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab1-37.indd 31‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺭﻧﺔ )ﺻﻮﺕ ﺭﻧﺔ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺭﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪/‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪/‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺭﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺭﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [DISC‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) .[CARD‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‬
‫)‪ [(Camera‬ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫)‪.[(Player‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪►On‬‬
‫‪►On‬‬
‫‪►English‬‬
‫‪►On‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺣﺮﻙ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <System‬ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺣﺮﻙ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ >‪) <Beep Sound‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺭﻧﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺣﺮﻙ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺃﻭ >‪) <Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪On‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪8/9/2006 3:53:27 PM‬‬
‫‪Move OK Select‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪Camera Mode‬‬
‫‪►System‬‬
‫‪Clock Set‬‬
‫‪Remote‬‬
‫‪Beep Sound‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪Demonstration‬‬
‫‪Camera Mode‬‬
‫‪►System‬‬
‫‪Clock Set‬‬
‫‪Remote‬‬
‫‪Beep Sound‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪Demonstration‬‬
‫‪Move OK Select‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab1-37.indd 32‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ( ))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[PHOTO‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) .[CARD‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫)‪.[(Camera‬‬
‫‪►On‬‬
‫‪►On‬‬
‫‪►On‬‬
‫‪►English‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺣﺮﻙ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <System‬ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺣﺮﻙ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Shutter Sound‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺣﺮﻙ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺃﻭ >‪) <Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪Move OK Select‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺭﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻚ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫‪8/9/2006 3:53:28 PM‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪On‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪M.Cam Mode‬‬
‫‪►System‬‬
‫‪Clock Set‬‬
‫‪Remote‬‬
‫‪Beep Sound‬‬
‫‪Shutter Sound‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪M.Cam Mode‬‬
‫‪►System‬‬
‫‪Clock Set‬‬
‫‪Remote‬‬
‫‪Beep Sound‬‬
‫‪Shutter Sound‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪Move OK Select‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab1-37.indd 33‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ‪) OSD‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( )‪(Language‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Language‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪/‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪/‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [DISC‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) .[CARD‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‬
‫)‪ [(Camera‬ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫)‪.[(Player‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺣﺮﻙ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <System‬ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺣﺮﻙ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ >‪ ،<Language‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪►On‬‬
‫‪►On‬‬
‫‪►English‬‬
‫‪►On‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪Camera Mode‬‬
‫‪►System‬‬
‫‪Clock Set‬‬
‫‪Remote‬‬
‫‪Beep Sound‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪Demonstration‬‬
‫‪Move OK Select‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺣﺮﻙ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ‪) OSD‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﺪﻳﺪ ‪) OSD‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ‪ Language‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪8/9/2006 3:53:28 PM‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab1-37.indd 34‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ(‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‪ :‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ .DVD‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٤٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﻳﺴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) .[DISC‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫)‪.[(Camera‬‬
‫‪►On‬‬
‫‪►On‬‬
‫‪►English‬‬
‫‪►On‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺣﺮﻙ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <System‬ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺣﺮﻙ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ >‪) <Demonstration‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪Move OK Select‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺣﺮﻙ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪On‬‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻌﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MF/AF ،EASY.Q ،BLC ،FADE‬ﺃﻭ ‪ COLOR NITE‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ‪ ،Demonstration‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Demonstration‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪Camera Mode‬‬
‫‪►System‬‬
‫‪Clock Set‬‬
‫‪Remote‬‬
‫‪Beep Sound‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪Demonstration‬‬
‫‪Camera Mode‬‬
‫‪►System‬‬
‫‪Clock Set‬‬
‫‪Remote‬‬
‫‪Beep Sound‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪Demonstration‬‬
‫‪Move OK Select‬‬
‫‪SAMSUNG Camcorder is ...‬‬
‫]‪[Digital Camcorder‬‬
‫‪Demonstration‬‬
‫‪8/9/2006 3:53:29 PM‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab1-37.indd 35‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) LCD‬ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ‪ /LCD‬ﻟﻮﻥ ‪(LCD‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪/‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪/‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ )‪ (LCD‬ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ‪ ٢٫٥‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ))‪ VP-DC161(i)/DC163(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪ ٧٫٢/‬ﺑﻮﺻﺎﺕ‬
‫))‪ VP-DC161W(i)/DC161WB(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ً ‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻓﻴﻬﺎ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ؛‬
‫ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ‪LCD‬‬‫ ﻟﻮﻥ ‪LCD‬‬‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [DISC‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) .[CARD‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫)‪ [(Camera‬ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫)‪.[(Player‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪►Off‬‬
‫‪Camera Mode‬‬
‫‪►Display‬‬
‫‪LCD Bright‬‬
‫‪LCD Colour‬‬
‫‪Date/Time‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺣﺮﻙ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Display‬ﻋﺮﺽ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺣﺮﻙ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ )‪) LCD Bright‬ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ‪ (LCD‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪) LCD Colour‬ﻟﻮﻥ ‪ ،((LCD‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺣﺮﻙ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ )‪) LCD Bright‬ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ‪ (LCD‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪) LCD Colour‬ﻟﻮﻥ ‪ ،((LCD‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻟـ >‪) <LCD Bright‬ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ‪ (LCD‬ﻭ>‪) <LCD Colour‬ﻟﻮﻥ ‪(LCD‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ >‪.<35> ~<00‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪8/9/2006 3:53:30 PM‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪Move OK Select‬‬
‫‪Camera Mode‬‬
‫‪►Display‬‬
‫‪LCD Bright‬‬
‫‪LCD Colour‬‬
‫‪Date/Time‬‬
‫‪Move OK Select‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab1-37.indd 36‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪/‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪/‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [DISC‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) .[CARD‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫)‪ [(Camera‬ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫)‪.[(Player‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪►Off‬‬
‫‪Camera Mode‬‬
‫‪►Display‬‬
‫‪LCD Bright‬‬
‫‪LCD Colour‬‬
‫‪Date/Time‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺣﺮﻙ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Display‬ﻋﺮﺽ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺣﺮﻙ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Date/Time‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺣﺮﻙ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪) <Off> :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪) <Date> ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‪) <Time> ،‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‪،‬‬
‫>‪) <Date&Time‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪Move OK Select‬‬
‫‪Camera Mode‬‬
‫‪►Display‬‬
‫‪LCD Bright‬‬
‫‪LCD Colour‬‬
‫‪Date/Time‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ‪ 12:00 01.1.2006‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﺰء ﻓﺎﺭﻍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.DVD‬‬‫ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻌﻒ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫‪8/9/2006 3:53:30 PM‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪Move OK Select‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab1-37.indd 37‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ]‬
‫)‪ [(Camera‬ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫)‪ ،[(Player‬ﺳﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳُﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﻢ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺼﻮﺭﺍ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺿﻮء ﻗﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٨‬‬
‫‪6/13/2006 5:28:18 PM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab38-58.indd 38‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺤﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻮﻱ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺤﺬﺭ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٣٩‬‬
‫‪6/13/2006 5:28:21 PM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab38-58.indd 39‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻪ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﻄﻼ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [DISC‬ﻭﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫)‪ [(Camera‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫]‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [OPEN‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺑﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ]‪ [PUSH CLOSE‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻹﻏﻼﻗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ]‪ .[ACCESS‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﻄﻼ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺣﻤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ﺑﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻟﻴﺲ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺷﻌﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﻄﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻷﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺸﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺬﺭ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺸﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٠‬‬
‫‪6/13/2006 5:28:28 PM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab38-58.indd 40‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪ :DVD-R/+R DL‬ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪ :DVD-RW‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ >ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻬﻴﺄ‪ .‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ؟<‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ Video‬ﻭ‪VR‬‬
‫‪) Video‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ : (Video‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺴﺠﻼﺕ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫‪) VR‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ : (VR‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳُﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) VR‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ١٢‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪ <Video‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<VR‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ١١‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ >ﺗﻢ!<‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ>ﺇﻟﻐﺎء<‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ >ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻬﻴﺄ!<‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻻﺣﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ >ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ<‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٨١‬‬
‫‪SP‬‬
‫‪Cancel‬‬
‫‪Disc is not formatted.‬‬
‫?‪Format‬‬
‫‪VR‬‬
‫‪Video‬‬
‫>ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﻣﻬﻴﺄ‪<.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪ :DVD+RW‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺘﻚ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ >ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ؟ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ!<‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪ ،<Yes‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ >ﺗﻢ!<‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ >ﻻ<‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ >ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻬﻴﺄ!<‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻻﺣﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ >ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ<‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٨١‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [OPEN‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺑﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ]‪ [PUSH CLOSE‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻹﻏﻼﻗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪6/13/2006 5:28:30 PM‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪٤١‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab38-58.indd 41‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ٍ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪) XP‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ( ﻭ‪) SP‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ﻭ‪) LP‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ SP‬ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻛﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) .[DISC‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫)‪.[(Player‬‬
‫)‪ [(Camera‬ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Record‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Rec Mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )‪ XP‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SP‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،(LP‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫])‪[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪►SP‬‬
‫‪►Off‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪Camera Mode‬‬
‫‪►Record‬‬
‫‪Rec Mode‬‬
‫‪Wind Cut‬‬
‫‪Move OK Select‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪XP‬‬
‫‪SP‬‬
‫‪LP‬‬
‫‪Camera Mode‬‬
‫‪►Record‬‬
‫‪Rec Mode‬‬
‫‪Wind Cut‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫*‬
‫*‬
‫)‪ ١٫٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ( ‪DVD-RW/+RW/-R‬‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮ ‪ ٦٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫)‪ ٢٫٦‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ( ‪DVD+R DL‬‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮ ‪ ٣٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮ ‪ ٥٣‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮ ‪ ١٠٦‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪0:00:00 -RW‬‬
‫‪20 min VR‬‬
‫‪Move OK Select‬‬
‫‪STBY XP‬‬
‫* ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ )‪.(VBR‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺃﻱ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻌﺪ ‪ VBR‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ً‬
‫ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٢‬‬
‫‪6/13/2006 5:28:32 PM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab38-58.indd 42‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻭﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٥ ،٢١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪) ‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ(‬
‫ﻗﺮﺻﺎ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٤٠‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ً‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪. [DISC‬‬
‫))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫)‪.[(Camera‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪) <STBY‬ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﺒﻘﻰ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻛﺎﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪.[Start/Stop‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪) <REC‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ [Start/Stop‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪) <STBY‬ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ [Start/Stop‬ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺇﻧﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٤ ٥‬‬
‫‪REC  XP 0:00:20 -RW‬‬
‫‪30 min VR‬‬
‫‪001‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ‪.‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٦٣‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢٥٣‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪) DVD-R/+RW/+R DL/-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٩٩٩‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.(VR‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺩﺍﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) STBY‬ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪ( ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٣‬‬
‫‪6/13/2006 5:28:34 PM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab38-58.indd 43‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﻨﺘﻬﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺒﺘﺪﺋﻴﻦ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(EASY.Q‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ EASY.Q‬ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ EASY.Q‬ﻷﻱ ﻣﺒﺘﺪﺉ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻳﺴﺮ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) .[DISC‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫)‪.[(Camera‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ ،[EASY.Q‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪) AF ، DIS‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪) AWB ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪،‬‬
‫‪) AE‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(( ﻋﻠﻰ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ >‪ <EASY.Q‬ﻭ‪ ( ) DIS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪.[Start/Stop‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻵﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪STBY SP 0:00:00 -RW‬‬
‫‪30 min VR‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [EASY.Q‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.EASY.Q‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﺘﺮﺟﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.EASY.Q‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،EASY.Q‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭ‪ BLC‬ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻭ‪ .Color Nite‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ً EASY.Q‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ EASY.Q‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﻻﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪16:9‬ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ VP-DC161(i)/DC163(i)) .EASY.Q‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻭﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.EASY.Q‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫‪6/13/2006 5:28:36 PM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab38-58.indd 44‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ( ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻫﺬﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻭﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ٍ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ /‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻓﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺯﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ ]‪ [Zoom‬ﺑﺒﻂء ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ /‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺪﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ /‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OSD‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ]‪) [T‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ(‪ :‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻲء ﺃﻗﺮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ]‪) [W‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ(‪ :‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻲء ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺷﻲء ﻳﺒﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ١٠‬ﻣﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ )‪ ٠٫٥‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪٤٥‬‬
‫‪6/13/2006 5:28:37 PM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab38-58.indd 45‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ ﻭﺍﻻﺧﺘﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ )ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎء(‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎء ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎء ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[DISC‬‬
‫))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫)‪.[(Camera‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[FADE‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻔﺎء ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺪﺭﺝ )ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎء ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [Start/Stop‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[FADE‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻴًﺎ )ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪STBY SP 0:00:00 -RW‬‬
‫‪30 min VR‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪SP 0:00:20 -RW‬‬
‫‪30 min VR‬‬
‫‪001‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪SP 0:00:30 -RW‬‬
‫‪30 min VR‬‬
‫‪REC‬‬
‫‪REC‬‬
‫‪001‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[FADE‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻔﺎء ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺪﺭﺝ )ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎء ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻋﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [Start/Stop‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ]‪[FADE‬‬
‫‪STBY SP 0:00:40 -RW‬‬
‫‪30 min VR‬‬
‫ﺃ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎء ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎء ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ(‬
‫ﺃ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎء ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ )ﻧﺤﻮ ‪ٍ ٤‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ .‬ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ )ﻧﺤﻮ ‪ ٤‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ(‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ‬
‫ﺏ‪ .‬ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪[FADE‬‬
‫‪٤٦‬‬
‫‪6/13/2006 5:28:38 PM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab38-58.indd 46‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ )‪(BLC‬‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ BLC‬ﻓﻲ ٍ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﻲء ﺃﺩﻛﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﺸﻲء ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ‪.‬‬‫ ﻳﺮﺗﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻼﺑﺲ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺃﻭ ﻻﻣﻌﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ؛ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺩﺍﻛ ًﻨﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻣﻼﻣﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﺸﻲء ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣُﻈﻠﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻲء ﺛﻠﺠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [DISC‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) .[CARD‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[BLC‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪) BLC‬‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫)‪.[(Camera‬‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،BLC‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [BLC‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [BLC‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ‪  BLC ‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ BLC‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.EASY.Q‬‬
‫‪STBY SP 0:00:00 -RW‬‬
‫‪20 min VR‬‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫‪٤٧‬‬
‫‪6/13/2006 5:28:40 PM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab38-58.indd 47‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Color Nite‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Color Nite‬ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻷﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ‪ ١٦:٩‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ .Color Nite‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٥٩‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) .[DISC‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫)‪.[(Camera‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ VP-DC161(i)/DC161W(i)/DC161WB(i)/DC163(i)) [COLOR NITE‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺃﻭ ]‪ VP-DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) [C.NITE/LED LIGHT‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪.‬‬
‫‪(VP-DC161(i)/DC161W(i)/‬‬
‫)‪ DC161WB(i)/DC163(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ VP-DC161(i)/DC161W(i)/DC161WB(i)/DC163(i)) [COLOR NITE‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺃﻭ ]‪ VP-DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) [C.NITE/LED LIGHT‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ؛‬
‫‪) <Color N. 1/25> ‬ﻟﻮﻥ ‪ (N.1/25‬ﻭ>‪) <Color N. 1/13‬ﻟﻮﻥ ‪ (N.1/13‬ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫))‪ VP-DC161(i)/DC161W(i)/DC161WB(i)/DC163(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪) <Color N. 1/25> ‬ﻟﻮﻥ ‪ (N.1/25‬ﻭ>‪) <Color N. 1/13‬ﻟﻮﻥ ‪(N.1/13‬‬
‫ﻭ>) (‪) <Color N. 1/13‬ﻟﻮﻥ ‪ (( ) N.1/13‬ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ VP-DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،Color Nite‬ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،Color Nite‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺒﻂء ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻴﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ AE‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺴﻴﻔﺴﺎء ﺃﻭ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺁﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺶ ‪ 2‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻴﻞ ‪ 2‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 16:9‬ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪.Color Nite‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺃﻭ ‪ ،EASY.Q‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.Color Nite‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫))‪ VP-DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪STBY SP 0:00:00 -RW‬‬
‫‪30 min VR‬‬
‫‪Color N.1/25‬‬
‫‪٤٨‬‬
‫‪6/13/2006 5:28:41 PM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab38-58.indd 48‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ))‪ VP-DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ّ ‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Color Nite‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) .[DISC‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫)‪.[(Camera‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [C.NITE/LED LIGHT‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ >)‬
‫( ‪) <Color N. 1/13‬ﻟﻮﻥ ‪.(N.1/13‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺴﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻔﺠﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪STBY SP 0:00:00 -RW‬‬
‫‪30 min VR‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﻭ ًﺩﺍ‪) .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٦٫٦‬ﺃﻗﺪﺍﻡ )ﻣﺘﺮﺍﻥ((‬
‫‪Color N.1/13‬‬
‫‪٤٩‬‬
‫‪6/13/2006 5:28:42 PM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab38-58.indd 49‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ )ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺻﻔﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﻃﺊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺤﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ‪.‬‬‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) .[DISC‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫)‪.[(Camera‬‬
‫‪►SP‬‬
‫‪►Off‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪Camera Mode‬‬
‫‪►Record‬‬
‫‪Rec Mode‬‬
‫‪Wind Cut‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Record‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Wind Cut‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﻙ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪Move OK Select‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ) ( ‪.‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪On‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﺎ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻄﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪Camera Mode‬‬
‫‪►Record‬‬
‫‪Rec Mode‬‬
‫‪Wind Cut‬‬
‫‪Move OK Select‬‬
‫‪STBY SP 0:00:00 -RW‬‬
‫‪30 min VR‬‬
‫‪٥٠‬‬
‫‪6/13/2006 5:28:43 PM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab38-58.indd 50‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﻏﺎﻟﻖ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ(‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ٍ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺘﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [DISC‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) .[CARD‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫)‪.[(Camera‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[QUICK MENU‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Shutter‬ﻏﺎﻟﻖ( ﺃﻭ >‪) <Exposure‬ﻋﺮﺽ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Manual‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻴ ًﻨﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ً [Joystick‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <1/50‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <1/120‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <1/250‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <1/500‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <1/1000‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫>‪ <1/2000‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <1/4000‬ﺃﻭ>‪.<1/10000‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﻦ >‪ <00‬ﻭ>‪.<29‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[QUICK MENU‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪DIS‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪Program AE‬‬
‫‪White Balance‬‬
‫‪Digital Effect‬‬
‫‪Shutter‬‬
‫‪Exposure‬‬
‫‪Q.MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪STBY SP 0:00:00 -RW‬‬
‫‪30 min VR‬‬
‫‪DIS‬‬
‫‪Program AE‬‬
‫‪White Balance‬‬
‫‪Digital Effect‬‬
‫‪Shutter‬‬
‫‪Manual‬‬
‫‪Exposure‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻟﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺲ‪ ١/٢٠٠٠ :‬ﺃﻭ ‪١/٤٠٠٠‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪ ١/١٠٠٠ :‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ١/٥٠٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪١/٢٥٠‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺔ‪١/١٢٠ :‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ً‬
‫ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺢ ‪ ،AE‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺮﺟﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻵﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻵﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.EASY.Q‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ‪ ١/١٠٠٠‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪0:00:00 -RW‬‬
‫‪30 min VR‬‬
‫‪STBY SP‬‬
‫‪Q.MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪S.1/50‬‬
‫‪20‬‬
‫‪٥١‬‬
‫‪6/13/2006 5:28:44 PM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab38-58.indd 51‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪/‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪/‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ٍ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳُﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ﺻﻌﺒًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺎً ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً‬
‫ﻣﻮﺛﻮﻕ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺧﺒﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ ،DVD‬ﻓﺈﻧﻨﺎ ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃ‪a‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫ﺏ‬
‫‪c‬ﺩ‬
‫ﺟـ‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃ‪ .‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻭ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ .‬ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﺤﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺜﻠﻮﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟـ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩ‪ .‬ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻻﻋﺐ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [DISC‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[CARD‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫)‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) .[(Camera‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MF/AF‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ) (‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ]‪ [VOL-‬ﻭ ]‪.[VOL+‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [VOL-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [VOL+‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MF/AF‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.EASY.Q‬‬
‫‪٣ ٤‬‬
‫‪STBY SP 0:00:00 -RW‬‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫‪30 min‬‬
‫‪min VR‬‬
‫‪Far‬‬
‫‪Near‬‬
‫‪٥٢‬‬
‫‪6/13/2006 5:28:45 PM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab38-58.indd 52‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺞ )ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪(AE‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ AE‬ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ AE‬ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻓﻬﻮ ﻳﻤﻨﺤﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻖ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ >ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ) (<‬
‫ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻲء ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ١/٥٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١/٢٥٠‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ > ﺭﻳﺎﺿﺔ ) (<‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ >ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ) (<‬
‫ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻲء ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ ﻳﻌﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) Portrait‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ( ً‬‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ١/٥٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١/١٠٠٠‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ >ﺇﻟﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ) (<‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﻠﻄﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻲء ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺿﻮء ﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ >ﺭﻣﻞ‪/‬ﺛﻠﺞ ) (<‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻻﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ >ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ) (< )ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻻﻋﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻟﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺲ‪.‬‬
‫‪STBY SP 0:00:00 -RW‬‬
‫‪30 min VR‬‬
‫‪٥٣‬‬
‫‪6/13/2006 5:28:46 PM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab38-58.indd 53‬‬
AR
‫ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬:DVD ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
(‫ )ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺞ‬Program AE ‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
Camera Mode
►Camera
Program AE
White Balance
Digital Effect
16:9 Wide
DIS
Digital Zoom
٤
►Auto
►Auto
►Off
►Off
►Off
►Off
Move OK Select
Camera Mode
►Camera
Program AE
White Balance
Digital Effect
16:9 Wide
DIS
Digital Zoom
] ‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ‬Power] ‫ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬.٢
.[Joystick(OK)] ‫ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬،(‫< )ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬Camera> ‫[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬Joystick] ‫ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬.٤
MENU Exit
‫ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬،(AE ‫< )ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬Program AE> ‫[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬Joystick] ‫ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬.٥
.[Joystick(OK)]
.‫ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬،AE ‫[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬Joystick] ‫ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬.٦
.[Joystick(OK)]
A
Auto
Sports
Portrait
Spotlight
Sand/Snow
High Speed
.[MENU] ‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬،‫ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‬.٧
.‫ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬
.‫ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺭﻣﺰ‬،(‫< )ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬Auto> ‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
MENU Exit
STBY SP 0:00:00 -RW
30 min VR
.[(Camera)
.[MENU] ‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬.٣
.‫ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
٦
Move OK Select
(‫ ﻓﻘﻂ‬VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) .[DISC] ‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ‬Mode] ‫ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬.١
٧
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
٢٧ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ .[QUICK MENU] ‫ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬AE ‫ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
.EASY.Q ‫ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬AE ‫ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
٥٤
00993J-RainBow-arab38-58.indd 54
6/13/2006 5:28:47 PM
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﻲ ٍ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ) (‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ً‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ) (‪ :‬ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬‫ ﺍﻟﺸﻲء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻟﺪﻳﻪ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﻴﻄﺮ‬‫ ﺍﻟﺸﻲء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫‪ ‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ) (‪ :‬ﻭﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﻸﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺴﻴﻄﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻮءﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬‫‪ ‬ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ) (‪ :‬ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪►Auto‬‬
‫‪►Auto‬‬
‫‪►Off‬‬
‫‪►Off‬‬
‫‪►Off‬‬
‫‪►Off‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [DISC‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) .[CARD‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫)‪.[(Camera‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪Auto‬‬
‫‪Indoor‬‬
‫‪Outdoor‬‬
‫‪Custom WB‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Camera‬ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Whit Balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )‪) Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ ‪) Indoor‬ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ( ﺃﻭ ‪Outdoor‬‬
‫)ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ( ﺃﻭ ‪) Custom WB‬ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ((‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٥٦‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺭﻣﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪Move OK Select‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪0:00:00 -RW‬‬
‫‪30 min VR‬‬
‫‪Camera Mode‬‬
‫‪►Camera‬‬
‫‪Program AE‬‬
‫‪White Balance‬‬
‫‪Digital Effect‬‬
‫‪16:9 Wide‬‬
‫‪DIS‬‬
‫‪Digital Zoom‬‬
‫‪Camera Mode‬‬
‫‪►Camera‬‬
‫‪Program AE‬‬
‫‪White Balance‬‬
‫‪Digital Effect‬‬
‫‪16:9 Wide‬‬
‫‪DIS‬‬
‫‪Digital Zoom‬‬
‫‪Move OK Select‬‬
‫‪STBY SP‬‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫‪6/13/2006 5:28:48 PM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab38-58.indd 55‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪) Custom White Balance‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ً‬
‫ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [DISC‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) .[CARD‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫)‪.[(Camera‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪Auto‬‬
‫‪Indoor‬‬
‫‪Outdoor‬‬
‫‪Custom WB‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Camera‬ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Whit Balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺣﺮﻙ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Custom WB‬ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ >‪) <Set White Balance‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪.‬‬
‫‪Move OK Select‬‬
‫‪Set White Balance‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﻲء ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ >‪) <Set White Balance‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ( ﻭﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ )‬
‫‪Camera Mode‬‬
‫‪►Camera‬‬
‫‪Program AE‬‬
‫‪White Balance‬‬
‫‪Digital Effect‬‬
‫‪16:9 Wide‬‬
‫‪DIS‬‬
‫‪Digital Zoom‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ .[QUICK MENU‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٧‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.EASY.Q‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ( ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﺮﺕ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪0:00:00 -RW‬‬
‫‪30 min VR‬‬
‫‪OK Select‬‬
‫‪STBY SP‬‬
‫‪٥٦‬‬
‫‪6/13/2006 5:28:48 PM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab38-58.indd 56‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ )ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﻔﺎء ﻟﻤﺴﺔ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ‪ ١٠‬ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <Art‬ﻓﻦ(‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍ ﺧﺸ ًﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ً‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <Mosaic‬ﻓﺴﻴﻔﺴﺎء(‬
‫ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺴﻴﻔﺴﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <Sepia‬ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ(‬
‫ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺻﺒﻐﺔ ﺑُﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻟﻸﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <Negative‬ﻧﻴﺠﺎﺗﻴﻒ(‬
‫ﻳﻌﻜﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻟﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <Mirror‬ﻣﺮﺁﺓ(‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺼﻔﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <BLK & WHT‬ﺃﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺃﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫ﻳُﻐﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <Emboss1‬ﻧﻘﺶ‪(1‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺭﺯﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <Emboss2‬ﻧﻘﺶ‪(2‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﻌ ًﺪﺍ ﺛﻼﺛﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺭﺯﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٩‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <Pastel1‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻴﻞ ‪(1‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺭﺳﻢ ً‬
‫ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١٠‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <Pastel2‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻴﻞ ‪(2‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺭﺳﻢ ً‬
‫ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪٥٧‬‬
‫‪6/13/2006 5:28:49 PM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab38-58.indd 57‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) .[DISC‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫)‪.[(Camera‬‬
‫‪►Auto‬‬
‫‪►Auto‬‬
‫‪►Off‬‬
‫‪►Off‬‬
‫‪►Off‬‬
‫‪►Off‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Camera‬ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Digital Effect‬ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪Art‬‬
‫‪Mosaic‬‬
‫‪Sepia‬‬
‫‪Negative‬‬
‫‪Mirror‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ .[QUICK MENU‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٧‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻓﺴﻴﻔﺴﺎء ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺁﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺶ ‪ 2‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻴﻞ ‪ 2‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺃﻭ ‪.Color Nite‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.EASY.Q‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻭ ‪ EASY.Q‬ﻭ‪ ،Color Nite‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﺴﻴﻔﺴﺎء ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺁﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺶ ‪ 2‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻴﻞ ‪.2‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﺴﻴﻔﺴﺎء ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺁﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺶ ‪ 2‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻴﻞ ‪.2‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺮﺁﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ 16:9‬ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‪ VP-DC161W(i)/DC161WB(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﻧﻘﺶ‪ 2‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻴﻞ ‪ 2‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺁﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺴﻴﻔﺴﺎء ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪Move OK Select‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪0:00:00 -RW‬‬
‫‪30 min VR‬‬
‫‪Camera Mode‬‬
‫‪►Camera‬‬
‫‪Program AE‬‬
‫‪White Balance‬‬
‫‪Digital Effect‬‬
‫‪16:9 Wide‬‬
‫‪DIS‬‬
‫‪Digital Zoom‬‬
‫‪Camera Mode‬‬
‫‪►Camera‬‬
‫‪Program AE‬‬
‫‪White Balance‬‬
‫‪Digital Effect‬‬
‫‪16:9 Wide‬‬
‫‪DIS‬‬
‫‪Digital Zoom‬‬
‫‪Move OK Select‬‬
‫‪STBY SP‬‬
‫‪Art‬‬
‫‪٥٨‬‬
‫‪6/13/2006 5:28:50 PM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab38-58.indd 58‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ )‪ 16:9‬ﻋﺮﻳﺾ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ 16:9‬ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺫﻱ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪.١٦:٩‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ 16:9‬ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﻄﺮﺯ )‪.VP-DC161W(i)/DC161WB(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) .[DISC‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫)‪.[(Camera‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪On‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Camera‬ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪ 16:9 ) <16:9 Wide‬ﻋﺮﻳﺾ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ 16:9‬ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ 16:9‬ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ >‪ 16:9 ) <16:9 Wide‬ﻋﺮﻳﺾ( ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪0:00:00 -RW‬‬
‫‪30 min VR‬‬
‫‪Camera Mode‬‬
‫‪►Camera‬‬
‫‪Program AE‬‬
‫‪White Balance‬‬
‫‪Digital Effect‬‬
‫‪16:9 Wide‬‬
‫‪DIS‬‬
‫‪Digital Zoom‬‬
‫‪Move OK Select‬‬
‫‪STBY SP‬‬
‫‪16:9 Wide‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ 16:9‬ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺃﻭ ‪ EASY.Q‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‪ VP-DC161(i)/DC163(i)) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،Color Nite‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ 16:9‬ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‪ VP-DC161(i)/DC163(i)) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ 16:9‬ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٩‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:30:55 AM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab59-82.indd 59‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ )ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ(‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )‪ (DIS‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗُﺼﻠﺢ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﺒﺒﻪ ﺃﻱ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻟﻠﻴﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺣﻤﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪) DVD‬ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻌﻘﻮﻟﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺍ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ً‬
‫ﺛﺒﺎﺗﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻌﻄﻲ‬
‫ً‬
‫ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‪(.‬‬‫ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺷﻲء ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ‬‫ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬‫‪٤‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻮﺍﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) .[DISC‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫)‪.[(Camera‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Camera‬ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <DIS‬ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪) DIS‬ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ ،DIS‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ >‪) <DIS‬ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ( ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ) (‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ .[QUICK MENU‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٧‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺃﻭ ‪ Color Nite‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﺴﻴﻔﺴﺎء ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺁﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺶ‪ 2‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻴﻞ ‪ 2‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ EASY.Q‬ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ 16:9‬ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ VP-DC161(i)/DC163(i)) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ 16:9‬ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫))‪ VP-DC161W(i)/DC161WB(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪►Auto‬‬
‫‪►Auto‬‬
‫‪►Off‬‬
‫‪►Off‬‬
‫‪►Off‬‬
‫‪►Off‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪Move OK Select‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪On‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪Camera Mode‬‬
‫‪►Camera‬‬
‫‪Program AE‬‬
‫‪White Balance‬‬
‫‪Digital Effect‬‬
‫‪16:9 Wide‬‬
‫‪DIS‬‬
‫‪Digital Zoom‬‬
‫‪Camera Mode‬‬
‫‪►Camera‬‬
‫‪Program AE‬‬
‫‪White Balance‬‬
‫‪Digital Effect‬‬
‫‪16:9 Wide‬‬
‫‪DIS‬‬
‫‪Digital Zoom‬‬
‫‪Move OK Select‬‬
‫‪STBY SP 0:00:00 -RW‬‬
‫‪30 min VR‬‬
‫‪٦٠‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:30:56 AM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab59-82.indd 60‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ )ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﺄﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣٣‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺭﻗﻤﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٢٠٠‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺮﺩﻯ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) .[DISC‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫)‪.[(Camera‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Camera‬ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Digital Zoom‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ )‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﺃﻭ ‪ 100x‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 200x‬ﺃﻭ ‪400x‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪ ،(1200x‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺃﻭ ‪ EASY.Q‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Color Nite‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 16:9‬ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﻔﺴﺎء ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺁﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺶ‪ 2‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻴﻞ ‪.2‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ Color Nite‬ﺃﻭ ‪ EASY.Q‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 16:9‬ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺴﻴﻔﺴﺎء ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺁﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺶ‪ 2‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻴﻞ ‪ ،2‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‪) .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪►Auto‬‬
‫‪►Auto‬‬
‫‪►Off‬‬
‫‪►Off‬‬
‫‪►Off‬‬
‫‪►Off‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪Move OK Select‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪Camera Mode‬‬
‫‪►Camera‬‬
‫‪Program AE‬‬
‫‪White Balance‬‬
‫‪Digital Effect‬‬
‫‪16:9 Wide‬‬
‫‪DIS‬‬
‫‪Digital Zoom‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪100x‬‬
‫‪200x‬‬
‫‪400x‬‬
‫‪1200x‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪0:00:00 -RW‬‬
‫‪30 min VR‬‬
‫‪Camera Mode‬‬
‫‪►Camera‬‬
‫‪Program AE‬‬
‫‪White Balance‬‬
‫‪Digital Effect‬‬
‫‪16:9 Wide‬‬
‫‪DIS‬‬
‫‪Digital Zoom‬‬
‫‪Move OK Select‬‬
‫‪STBY SP‬‬
‫‪T‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪٦١‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:30:56 AM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab59-82.indd 61‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ : DVD‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻳﻘﺼﺪ ﺑـ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ؟‬
‫‪Current Title List/‬‬
‫‪Total‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‪Title‬‬
‫‪List‬‬
‫‪Current‬‬
‫‪Title‬‬
‫‪List/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪Total‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ‪Title‬‬
‫‪List‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﻤﺎ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺗﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[1/9‬‬
‫]‪[1/9‬‬
‫‪Next Page‬‬
‫‪Next Page‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ؟‬
‫‪)DVD-RW١‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪( VR‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ )ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻞ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫)ﻓﺼﻼ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٩٩٩‬ﻣﺸﻬ ًﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻟﻘﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻀﻌﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) VR‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻞ ﻭﺗﺮﻏﺐ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻲء ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﻤﺎ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺗﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣٠‬ﻳﻨﺎﻳﺮ ‪٢٠٠٦‬‬
‫‪ ١٢‬ﻳﻨﺎﻳﺮ ‪٢٠٠٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪١‬‬
‫‪١٠:٠٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪٢‬‬
‫‪١٠:٣٠‬‬
‫‪Previous Page‬‬
‫‪Previous Page‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪٣‬‬
‫‪١١:٣٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪٤‬‬
‫‪١٤:٠٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪٥‬‬
‫‪١٤:١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪٧‬‬
‫‪١٤:٢٠‬‬
‫‪١٤:٣٠‬‬
‫‪Playlist‬‬
‫‪Playlist‬‬
‫]‪[1/7‬‬
‫]‪[1/7‬‬
‫‪Next Page‬‬
‫‪Next Page‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪/‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪Current‬‬
‫‪Playlist/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪Total‬‬
‫‪Playlist‬‬
‫‪Current‬‬
‫‪Playlist/‬‬
‫‪Total Playlist‬‬
‫‪Previous Page‬‬
‫‪Previous Page‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪١‬‬
‫‪٦٢‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:31:01 AM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab59-82.indd 62‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬
‫‪DVD-RW/+RW/-R/+R DLL‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻛﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ )ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٦٤‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) .[DISC‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫)‪.[(Player‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .LCD‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٣٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪ [Joystick(OK‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫‪ ‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[(Stop)‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫]‪[1/9‬‬
‫‪Next Page‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪-RW‬‬
‫‪Previous Page‬‬
‫‪► SP 0:00:01‬‬
‫‪VR‬‬
‫‪001‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻞ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪DVD-RW/+RW/-R/+R DLL‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] ‪ [ VOL -,+‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 00‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.19‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻏﻠﻘﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪-RW‬‬
‫‪► SP 0:00:01‬‬
‫‪VR‬‬
‫‪001‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪٦٣‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:31:05 AM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab59-82.indd 63‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ(‬
‫‪DVD-RW/+RW/-R/+R DLL‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﻭ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﻄﻲء ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ /‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ []/[‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺤﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ X٢‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺤﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪.x١٦‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ‪ ١‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OSD‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ‪ ١٦ = ٢‬ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺸﻲء ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ]‪ []/[‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ‪ /‬ﺗﺮﺟﻴﻊ(‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ‪ /‬ﺗﺮﺟﻴﻊ(‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ]‪ []/[‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ ،[‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ ،[‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻳﺠﻌﻠﻪ ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺰء ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ٣‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ‪٣‬‬
‫‪٦٤‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:31:05 AM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab59-82.indd 64‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﻲء )ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ‪ /‬ﺗﺮﺟﻴﻊ( ))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﻲء‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [|‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫‪٦٥‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:31:06 AM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab59-82.indd 65‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪(PB‬‬
‫‪DVD-RW/+RW/-R/+R DLL‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪ PB‬ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻤﻜﻨّﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪ PB‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) .[DISC‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫)‪.[(Player‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫])‪ [Joystick(OK‬ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Zoom‬ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ])‪ [ T(Tele‬ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪ PB‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٨‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪.[Zoom‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺐ ﻣﺮﺗﺎﻥ ‪ ٤ ‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ‪ ٨ ‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪-RW‬‬
‫‪VR‬‬
‫‪► SP 0:00:00‬‬
‫‪PB ZOOM 2.0x‬‬
‫‪001‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻴ ًﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ً‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪ ،PB‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Zoom‬ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ])‪.[W(Wide‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪ PB‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪ PB‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٦‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:31:06 AM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab59-82.indd 66‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ )ﺣﺬﻑ(‬
‫‪DVD-RW/+RW1‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) .[DISC‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫)‪.[(Player‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[QUICK MENU‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Delete‬ﺣﺬﻑ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Select‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ( ﺃﻭ >‪) <Select All‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪) Select ‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ(‪ :‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ > <‪.‬‬
‫‪) Select All ‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ(‪ :‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪ [Joystick(OK‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ>‪) <Select All‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ > <‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Execute‬ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ >?‪) <Delete‬ﺣﺬﻑ؟(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪ ،<Yes‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪) DVD-RW) .‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ VR‬ﻓﻘﻂ((‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫]‪[1/9‬‬
‫‪Select‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫‪Partial Delete‬‬
‫‪Q.MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫]‪[1/9‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫‪Execute‬‬
‫‪OK Select‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫‪Execute‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫?‪Delete‬‬
‫‪No‬‬
‫‪OK Select‬‬
‫‪Yes‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪٦٧‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:31:13 AM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab59-82.indd 67‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ )ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪)DVD-RW١‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(VR‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ .(VR‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫‪ DVD-RW‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) VR‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٤١‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[DISC‬‬
‫)‪.[(Player‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[QUICK MENU‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Partial Delete‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ >‪) <Start‬ﺑﺪء(‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [/‬ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ >‪) <End‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء(‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [/‬ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .٩‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ >‪) <Execute‬ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١٠‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ >‪) <Delete selected part ? Please confirm.‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ؟‬
‫ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.(.‬‬
‫‪ .١١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪ ،<Yes‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Back‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪ [Joystick(OK‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫]‪[1/9‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫‪Partial Delete‬‬
‫‪Q.MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪SP 00:00:00 -RW‬‬
‫‪00:00:15‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫‪Search‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪Start‬‬
‫‪End‬‬
‫‪Execute‬‬
‫‪Play‬‬
‫‪Pause‬‬
‫‪SP 00:00:12 -RW‬‬
‫‪00:00:15‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫‪Search‬‬
‫‪Partial Delete‬‬
‫‪001‬‬
‫‪Partial Delete‬‬
‫‪001‬‬
‫‪Start‬‬
‫‪End‬‬
‫‪Execute‬‬
‫‪Play‬‬
‫‪Pause‬‬
‫‪SP 00:00:12 -RW‬‬
‫‪Partial Delete‬‬
‫‪001‬‬
‫? ‪Delete selected part‬‬
‫‪Please confirm.‬‬
‫‪Yes‬‬
‫‪No‬‬
‫‪00:00:15‬‬
‫‪Start‬‬
‫‪End‬‬
‫‪Execute‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫‪Play‬‬
‫‪Pause‬‬
‫‪Search‬‬
‫‪٦٨‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:31:15 AM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab59-82.indd 68‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ(‬
‫‪)DVD-RW١‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(VR‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ .(VR‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪VR‬‬
‫)ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٤١‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪Playlist‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) .[DISC‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫)‪.[(Player‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ) (‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪[Joystick‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ) (‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪Next Page‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪Playlist‬‬
‫‪New Playlist‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫‪Edit Playlist‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[QUICK MENU‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <New Playlist‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪Previous Page‬‬
‫‪Q.MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪New Playlist‬‬
‫‪Add‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺋﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ >‪.<‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Add‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٩٩‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫)ﻓﺼﻼ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٩٩٩‬ﻣﺸﻬ ًﺪﺍ‬
‫‪Next Page‬‬
‫‪Previous Page‬‬
‫‪Playlist‬‬
‫] ‪[1/1‬‬
‫‪Next Page‬‬
‫‪Previous Page‬‬
‫‪٦٩‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:31:17 AM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab59-82.indd 69‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪)DVD-RW١‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(VR‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٦٤‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ .(VR‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪VR‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٤١‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫]‪[1/9‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) .[DISC‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫)‪.[(Player‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪Next Page‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ) (‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪[Joystick‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ) (‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫‪Previous Page‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪Playlist‬‬
‫]‪[1/7‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ]‪ [VOL -,+‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪Next Page‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪0:00:01 -RW‬‬
‫‪VR‬‬
‫‪Previous Page‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪٧٠‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:31:23 AM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab59-82.indd 70‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺣﺬﻑ( ‪)DVD-RW٢‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪. (VR‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ .(VR‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪VR‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٤١‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) .[DISC‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫)‪.[(Player‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ) (‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪[Joystick‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ) (‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[QUICK MENU‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Delete‬ﺣﺬﻑ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Select‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ( ﺃﻭ >‪) <Select All‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪) Select ‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ(‪ :‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺤﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ> <‪.‬‬
‫‪) Select All ‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ(‪ :‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪ [Joystick(OK‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Select All‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻛﻞ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ > <‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Execute‬ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ >?‪) <Delete‬ﺣﺬﻑ؟(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪ ،<Yes‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪Playlist‬‬
‫]‪[1/7‬‬
‫‪Select‬‬
‫‪New Playlist‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫‪Edit Playlist‬‬
‫‪Q.MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪Playlist‬‬
‫]‪[1/7‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫‪Execute‬‬
‫‪OK Select‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫‪Playlist‬‬
‫‪Execute‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫?‪Delete‬‬
‫‪No‬‬
‫‪OK Select‬‬
‫‪Yes‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪٧١‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:31:35 AM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab59-82.indd 71‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ -‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ(‬
‫‪)DVD-RW١‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(VR‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ .(VR‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪VR‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٤١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫]‪[1/9‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) .[DISC‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫)‪.[(Player‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ) (‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪[Joystick‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ) (‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪Previous Page‬‬
‫‪Next Page‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪Playlist‬‬
‫]‪[1/7‬‬
‫]‪[1/7‬‬
‫‪New Playlist‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫‪Edit Playlist‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[QUICK MENU‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Edit Playlist‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪Exit Page‬‬
‫‪Q.MENU‬‬
‫‪Previous‬‬
‫‪Next Page‬‬
‫‪Playlist‬‬
‫‪0:00:01 -RW‬‬
‫]‪[1/7‬‬
‫‪VR‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Scene‬‬
‫‪Add‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫‪Partial Delete‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪10 Exit‬‬
‫‪Q.MENU‬‬
‫‪Edit > Add‬‬
‫]‪[4/9‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫‪٧٢‬‬
‫‪Execute‬‬
‫‪Next Page‬‬
‫‪Previous Page‬‬
‫‪Edit > Add‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:31:44 AM‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫‪Execute‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab59-82.indd‬‬
‫‪72‬‬
‫‪Playlist‬‬
‫]‪[1/7‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Add‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٩‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪.<‬‬
‫‪ .١٠‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Execute‬ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ >?‪) <Want to add‬ﻫﻞ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ؟(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻴ ًﻨﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪ ،<Yes‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .١١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ً [Joystick‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ >‪) <Now adding...‬ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‪.(...‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫[ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫]‪ [(Stop)‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪New Playlist‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫‪Edit Playlist‬‬
‫‪Q.MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪Scene‬‬
‫‪Playlist‬‬
‫]‪[1/7‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫‪Add‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫‪Partial Delete‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪Q.MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪Edit > Add‬‬
‫]‪[4/9‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫‪Execute‬‬
‫‪Next Page‬‬
‫‪Previous Page‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪Edit > Add‬‬
‫‪Execute‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫?‪Want to add‬‬
‫‪No‬‬
‫‪Next Page‬‬
‫‪Yes‬‬
‫‪Previous Page‬‬
‫‪٧٣‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:31:45 AM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab59-82.indd 73‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ -‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ( ‪)DVD-RW١‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(VR‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ .(VR‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪VR‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٤١‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) .[DISC‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫)‪.[(Player‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫]‪[1/9‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ) (‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪[Joystick‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ) (‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪. [QUICK MENU‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Edit Playlist‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪Previous Page‬‬
‫‪Next Page‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪Playlist‬‬
‫‪Playlist‬‬
‫]‪[1/7‬‬
‫]‪[1/7‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[QUICK MENU‬‬
‫‪New Playlist‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫‪Edit Playlist‬‬
‫‪Q.MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪Previous Page‬‬
‫‪Next Page‬‬
‫‪Playlist‬‬
‫‪-RW‬‬
‫]‪0:00:01[1/9‬‬
‫‪Back VR‬‬
‫‪Scene‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Add‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫‪Partial Delete‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪٧٤‬‬
‫‪Q.MENU‬‬
‫‪10 Exit‬‬
‫‪Playlist‬‬
‫]‪[1/9‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:31:52 AM‬‬
‫‪Edit > Move‬‬
‫‪Execute‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab59-82.indd 74‬‬
‫‪Playlist‬‬
‫]‪[1/7‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪New Playlist‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫‪Edit Playlist‬‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Move‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .٩‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻧﻘﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ >‪.<‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Q.MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪Scene‬‬
‫‪Playlist‬‬
‫]‪[1/9‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫‪Add‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫‪Partial Delete‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪.١٠‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Execute‬ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ >?‪) <Want to move‬ﻫﻞ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ؟(‪.‬‬
‫‪Q.MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪Edit > Move‬‬
‫‪Playlist‬‬
‫]‪[1/9‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻴ ًﻨﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪ ،<Yes‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .١٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ً [Joystick‬‬
‫)ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.(...‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ >‪ٍ <Now moveing...‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺑﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Execute‬‬
‫‪Next Page‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪Previous Page‬‬
‫‪Edit > Move‬‬
‫‪Playlist‬‬
‫‪Execute‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫?‪Want to move‬‬
‫‪No‬‬
‫‪Next Page‬‬
‫‪Yes‬‬
‫‪Previous Page‬‬
‫‪٧٥‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:31:53 AM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab59-82.indd 75‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ -‬ﺣﺬﻑ( ‪)DVD-RW١‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪. (VR‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) VR‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ((‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ‪DVD-RW‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ VR‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٤١‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) .[DISC‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫)‪.[(Player‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ) (‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪[Joystick‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ) (‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[QUICK MENU‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Edit Playlist‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[QUICK MENU‬‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Delete‬ﺣﺬﻑ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .٩‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪.<‬‬
‫‪.١٠‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Execute‬ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ >?‪) <Delete‬ﺣﺬﻑ؟(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻴ ًﻨﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪ ،<Yes‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪.١١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ً [Joystick‬‬
‫)ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.(...‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ >‪<Now deleting...‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪Playlist‬‬
‫]‪[1/7‬‬
‫‪New Playlist‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫‪Edit Playlist‬‬
‫‪Q.MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪Scene‬‬
‫‪Playlist‬‬
‫]‪[1/9‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫‪Add‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫‪Partial Delete‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪Q.MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪Playlist‬‬
‫‪Edit > Delete‬‬
‫]‪[1/9‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫‪Execute‬‬
‫‪Next Page‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪Playlist‬‬
‫‪Previous Page‬‬
‫‪Edit > Delete‬‬
‫‪Execute‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫?‪Delete‬‬
‫‪No‬‬
‫‪Next Page‬‬
‫‪Yes‬‬
‫‪Previous Page‬‬
‫‪٧٦‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:32:00 AM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab59-82.indd 76‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ -‬ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﺟﺰﺋﻲ( ‪) DVD-RW١‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(VR‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) VR‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ((‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ‪DVD-RW‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ VR‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٤١‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) .[DISC‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫)‪.[(Player‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪Playlist‬‬
‫‪Flower‬‬
‫]‪[1/7‬‬
‫‪New Playlist‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫‪Edit Playlist‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ) (‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ) (‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[QUICK MENU‬‬
‫‪Q.MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Edit Playlist‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[QUICK MENU‬‬
‫‪Playlist‬‬
‫‪Scene‬‬
‫]‪[1/9‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫‪Add‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫‪Partial Delete‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪Q.MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪SP 00:00:00 -RW‬‬
‫‪Partial Delete‬‬
‫‪001‬‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Partial Delete‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .٩‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ >‪) <Start‬ﺑﺪء(‪.‬‬
‫‪00:00:13‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫‪Search‬‬
‫‪Start‬‬
‫‪End‬‬
‫‪Execute‬‬
‫‪Play‬‬
‫‪Pause‬‬
‫‪٧٧‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:32:04 AM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab59-82.indd 77‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪.١٠‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [/‬ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪SP 00:00:10 -RW‬‬
‫[ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪Partial Delete‬‬
‫‪001‬‬
‫‪.١١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ >‪) <End‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء(‪.‬‬
‫‪.١٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [/‬ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫‪00:00:13‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫‪Search‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪.١٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ >‪) <Execute‬ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ(‪.‬‬
‫‪.١٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ >‪) <Delete selected part? Please confirm.‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ؟ ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.(.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻴ ًﻨﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪ ،<Yes‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪.١٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪[Joystick‬‬
‫ً‬
‫)ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.(...‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ >‪<Now deleting...‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪Start‬‬
‫‪End‬‬
‫‪Execute‬‬
‫‪Play‬‬
‫‪Pause‬‬
‫‪SP 00:00:10 -RW‬‬
‫‪Partial Delete‬‬
‫‪001‬‬
‫? ‪Delete selected part‬‬
‫‪Please confirm.‬‬
‫‪No‬‬
‫‪00:00:13‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫‪Search‬‬
‫‪Yes‬‬
‫‪Start‬‬
‫‪End‬‬
‫‪Execute‬‬
‫‪Play‬‬
‫‪Pause‬‬
‫‪٧٨‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:32:04 AM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab59-82.indd 78‬‬
AR
‫ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬:DVD ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
DVD-RW/+RW/-R/+R DLi
(‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ )ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
٢٦ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ .‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‬
ٍ ‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
(‫ ﻓﻘﻂ‬VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) .[DISC] ‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ‬Mode] ‫ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬.١
٤
Camera Mode
►Disc Manager
Disc Finalize
Disc Unfinalize
Disc Format
Disc Info
] ‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ‬Power] ‫ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬.٢
‫ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬،(‫< )ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬Disc Manager> ‫[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬Joystick] ‫ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬.٤
.[Joystick(OK)]
٥
Disc lnfo
Disc Name: DVD-RW
Rename
Back
Disc Type
DVD-RW (Unfinalized)
Disc Format
VR Mode
Used Space
00:02:20
Free Space
00:16:08 (SP)
OK Select
] ‫([ ﺃﻭ‬Camera)
.[MENU] ‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬.٣
.‫ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
Move OK Select MENU Exit
Move
.[(Player)
‫ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬،(‫< )ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬Disc Info> ‫[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬Joystick] ‫ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬.٥
.[Joystick(OK)]
‫< )ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ( ﻭ‬Disc Type>‫< ﻭ‬Disc Name> ‫ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ‬
<Free Space>‫< )ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻐﻠﺔ( ﻭ‬Used Space>‫< )ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ( ﻭ‬Disc Format>
.(‫)ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‬
.[Joystick(OK)] ‫[ ﺃﻭ‬MENU] ‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬،‫ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‬.٦
MENU Exit
٧٩
00993J-RainBow-arab59-82.indd 79
6/14/2006 10:32:05 AM
AR
‫ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬:DVD ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
٤
Camera Mode
►Disc Manager
Disc Finalize
Disc Unfinalize
Disc Format
Disc Info
DVD-RW/+RW/-R/+R DL1 (‫ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ‬
(‫ ﻓﻘﻂ‬VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) .[DISC] ‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ‬Mode] ‫ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬.١
.[(Player)
Move OK Select MENU Exit
٥
Camera Mode
►Disc Manager
Disc Finalize
Disc Unfinalize
Disc Format
Disc Info
٦
Disc Name : DVD-RW
Rename
Back
Disc Type
DVD-RW (Unfinalized)
Disc Format
VR Mode
Used Space
00:02:20
Free Space
00:16:08 (SP)
D
I
N
S
X
١٠
E
J
O
T
Y
a
f
k
p
u
z
b
g
l
q
v
Move
c
h
m
r
w
d
i
n
s
x
e
j
o
t
y
Back
1
6
+
!
:
@
2
7
?
;
#
3
8
*
~
“
$
‫ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬،(‫< )ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ‬Rename> ‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻴ ًﻨﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
ً [Joystick] ‫ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬.٦
.[Joystick(OK)]
.‫ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
.‫[ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬Joystick] ‫ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬.٧
MENU Exit
OK Select
Disc Name : Science_
Delete
Space
Done
C
H
M
R
W
.[MENU] ‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬.٣
.‫ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫[ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬Joystick(OK)] ‫ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬،<Delete> ‫[ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬Joystick] ‫ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬.٨
.‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
Disc Name
B
G
L
Q
V
] ‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ‬Power] ‫ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬.٢
‫ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬،(‫< )ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬Disc Info> ‫[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬Joystick] ‫ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬.٥
.[Joystick(OK)]
Disc lnfo
A
F
K
P
U
Z
] ‫([ ﺃﻭ‬Camera)
‫ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬،(‫< )ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬Disc Manager> ‫[ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬Joystick] ‫ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬.٤
.[Joystick(OK)]
Move OK Select MENU Exit
Move
‫ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬- ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ )ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
٢٦ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ .‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‬
ٍ ‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
.‫ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺹ‬
4
9
/
,
(
%
5
0
^
.
)
&
.[Joystick(OK)] ‫ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬،‫[ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‬Joystick] ‫ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬.٩
.[Joystick(OK)] ‫ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬،<Done> ‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬Joystick] ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬.١٠
.‫ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫[ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬Joystick] ‫< ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬Back>‫ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬،[Joystick(OK)] ‫ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
.(‫ )ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬Disc Manager
OK Select
٨٠
00993J-RainBow-arab59-82.indd 80
6/14/2006 10:32:06 AM
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ )ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ( ‪DVD-RW/+RW1‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) .[DISC‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫)‪.[(Camera‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Disc Manager‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Disc Format‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Video Mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ (Video‬ﺃﻭ >‪<VR Mode‬‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،(VR‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪ DVD-RW) .[Joystick(OK‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ ،DVD-RW‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ VR) All files will‬ﺃﻭ ‪<Disc format? (Video‬‬
‫>!‪) be deleted‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ؟ )‪ Video‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (VR‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ!(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺴﺠﻼﺕ ‪DVD‬‬
‫‪Video‬‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ‪(Video‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳُﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫‪) VR‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪(VR‬‬
‫‪ DVD‬ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) VR‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ١٢‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD+RW‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ >!‪<Disc format? All files will be deleted‬‬
‫)ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ؟ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ!(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻴ ًﻨﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪ ،<Yes‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ً [Joystick‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻭﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ >!‪) <Complete‬ﺗﻢ!(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺬﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤُﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:32:06 AM‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪Camera Mode‬‬
‫‪►Disc Manager‬‬
‫‪Disc Finalize‬‬
‫‪Disc Unfinalize‬‬
‫‪Disc Format‬‬
‫‪Disc Info‬‬
‫‪Move OK Select MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪Video Mode‬‬
‫‪VR Mode‬‬
‫‪Camera Mode‬‬
‫‪►Disc Manager‬‬
‫‪Disc Finalize‬‬
‫‪Disc Unfinalize‬‬
‫‪Disc Format‬‬
‫‪Disc Info‬‬
‫‪Move OK Select MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪SP 00:00:00 -RW‬‬
‫‪30 min VR‬‬
‫‪STBY‬‬
‫)‪Disc format? (Video‬‬
‫!‪All files will be deleted‬‬
‫‪No‬‬
‫‪Yes‬‬
‫‪Cannot edit in camcorder.‬‬
‫‪٨١‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab59-82.indd 81‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ )ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ(‬
‫‪DVD-RW/-R/+R DL-‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD-RW/-R/+R DL‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺴﺠﻼﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻗﻔﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻗﺪﺭ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) .[DISC‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫)‪.[(Camera‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Disc Manager‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Disc Finalize‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻴ ًﻨﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Finalize‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ً [Joystick‬‬
‫)ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ(‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻗﻔﺎﻝ‪،‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ >‪ٍ <Finalizing, please wait...‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ >!‪) <Complete‬ﺗﻢ!(‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪Camera Mode‬‬
‫‪►Disc Manager‬‬
‫‪Disc Finalize‬‬
‫‪Disc Unfinalize‬‬
‫‪Disc Format‬‬
‫‪Disc Info‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪Move OK Select‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪Camera Mode‬‬
‫‪►Disc Manager‬‬
‫‪Disc Finalize‬‬
‫‪Disc Unfinalize‬‬
‫‪Disc Format‬‬
‫‪Disc Info‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺬﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻟﻼﺻﻄﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻋﻄﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ١٢‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺅﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻧﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺴﺠﻼﺕ ‪ .DVD‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻴﺲ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺴﺠﻼﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ ،DVD-R.+R DL‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD+RW‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺋﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎءﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎﻛﻨﺘﻮﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪Move OK Select‬‬
‫‪Disc Finalize‬‬
‫‪Disc Name : Science‬‬
‫‪Finalize‬‬
‫‪Rename‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪Protect‬‬
‫‪VR Mode‬‬
‫‪Disc Format‬‬
‫‪00:02:20‬‬
‫‪Used Space‬‬
‫)‪00:16:08 (SP‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪OK Select‬‬
‫‪Free Space‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪٨٢‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:32:07 AM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab59-82.indd 82‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪DVD‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻄﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪.(DVD‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺷﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻘﻔﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺷﻐﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻴﻨﺌ ٍﺬ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﺍﺑﺪﺃ“‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ ٨‬ﻣﻠﻢ‪.‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪١٠‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺴﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺅﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎﻛﻨﺘﻮﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) VR‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪PC‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎءﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‪/‬ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪) DVD-R/-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ R DL+/ (Video‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺴﺠﻼﺕ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻧﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺴﺠﻼﺕ ‪ .DVD‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻜﺔ ﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪/‬ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻴﺲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻤﻌﻈﻢ ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺴﺠﻼﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD+RW‬ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺅﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ١٢‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻤﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ ،DVD‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪/‬ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪:VR‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎءﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ VR‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪DVD-‬‬
‫‪ RW‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ‪.VR‬‬
‫‪٨٣‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:33:42 AM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab83-107.indd 83‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ )ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ(‬
‫‪1DVD-RW1‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺅﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ VR‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،Video‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) .[DISC‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫)‪.[(Camera‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪Camera Mode‬‬
‫‪►Disc Manager‬‬
‫‪Disc Finalize‬‬
‫‪Disc Unfinalize‬‬
‫‪Disc Format‬‬
‫‪Disc Info‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Disc Manager‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Disc Unfinalize‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪OK Select‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪Camera Mode‬‬
‫‪►Disc Manager‬‬
‫‪Disc Finalize‬‬
‫‪Disc Unfinalize‬‬
‫‪Disc Format‬‬
‫‪Disc Info‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻴ ًﻨﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Unfinalize‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ً [Joystick‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ >‪) <Unfinalizing, please wait...‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪ .(...‬ﻭﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻹﻗﻔﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ >!‪) <Complete‬ﺗﻢ!(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺬﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻟﻼﺻﻄﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻋﻄﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪OK Select‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪Disc Unfinalize‬‬
‫‪Disc Name : Science‬‬
‫‪Unfinalize‬‬
‫‪Rename‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪Protect‬‬
‫‪VR Mode‬‬
‫‪Disc Format‬‬
‫‪00:02:20‬‬
‫‪Used Space‬‬
‫)‪00:16:08 (SP‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪OK Select‬‬
‫‪Free Space‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪٨٤‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:33:43 AM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab83-107.indd 84‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺮﺝ‪/‬ﺩﺧﻞ ‪ VP-DC161i/DC161Wi/DC161WBi/DC163i/DC165Wi/DC165WBi) AV‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺧﺮﺝ‪/‬ﺩﺧﻞ ‪ AV‬ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ّ ‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﺮﺝ‪/‬ﺩﺧﻞ ‪ AV‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) .[DISC‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫)‪.[(Player‬‬
‫‪►SP‬‬
‫‪►Out‬‬
‫‪Player Mode‬‬
‫‪►Record‬‬
‫‪Rec Mode‬‬
‫‪AV In/out‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Record‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <AV In/Out‬ﺧﺮﺝ‪/‬ﺩﺧﻞ ‪ ،(AV‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Out‬ﺧﺮﺝ(‪) <AV In> ،‬ﺩﺧﻞ ‪ (AV‬ﺃﻭ >‪<S-Video In‬‬
‫)ﺩﺧﻞ ‪ (S-Video‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫>‪) <AV In/Out‬ﺧﺮﺝ‪/‬ﺩﺧﻞ ‪ (AV‬ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <Out‬ﺧﺮﺝ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪OK Select‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪Out‬‬
‫‪AV In‬‬
‫‪S-Video In‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪-RW‬‬
‫‪0:00:10‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪Player Mode‬‬
‫‪►Record‬‬
‫‪Rec Mode‬‬
‫‪AV In/out‬‬
‫‪OK Select‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪STBY SP‬‬
‫‪VR‬‬
‫‪AV In‬‬
‫‪٨٥‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:33:44 AM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab83-107.indd 85‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ .PAL‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪١١٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻧﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺫﻱ ﻗﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ‪/‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ AV‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ‪ :‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺕ )ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ‪ -‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺕ )ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ )ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺑﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺻﻮﺕ – ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[DISC‬‬
‫))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫)‪.[(Player‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﺷﻐﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٦٣‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ AV‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪ ،AV/S‬ﻓﺈﻧﻚ ﺳﺘﺴﻤﻊ ً‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺻﻮﺕ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٦‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:33:45 AM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab83-107.indd 86‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ‪) Audio/Video‬ﺻﻮﺕ‪/‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ AV‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ‪ :‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺕ )ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ‪ -‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺕ )ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[DISC‬‬
‫))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫)‪.[(Player‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺷﻐﻞ ً‬
‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Line‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ AV‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺷﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٦٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﻯ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺻﻮﺕ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٧‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:33:47 AM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab83-107.indd 87‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ‪ AV/S‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[DISC‬‬
‫))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫)‪.[(Player‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ AV‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ AV‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ‪ :‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺕ )ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ‪ -‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺕ )ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ AV‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ .DVD‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٦٣‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [DISPLAY‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [(Stop) ‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫‪٨٨‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:33:48 AM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab83-107.indd 88‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﻧﺴﺦ( ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ )‪ VP-DC161i/DC161Wi/DC161WBi/DC163i/DC165Wi/DC165WBi‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ( ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ‪ AV/S‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺮﺝ‪/‬ﺩﺧﻞ ‪ AV‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ(‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٨٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ AV‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ AV‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ‪ :‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺕ )ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ‪ -‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺕ )ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻓﺎﺭﻍ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ١١‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [Start/Stop‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [Start/Stop‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ AV‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ )ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [(Stop) ‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ DVD‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٩‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:33:49 AM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab83-107.indd 89‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ( )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Off‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ‪(Memory Stick Duo/MMC‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ‪ Memory Stick Duo/MMC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،Memory Stick Duo/MMC‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ"‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫>‪<Memory Stick/Memory Stick PRO‬‬
‫>‪<MMC/SD‬‬
‫ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‬
‫>‪<RS MMC/Mini SD‬‬
‫>‪<Memory Stick Duo‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ RS MMC ،Memory Stick Duo‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Mini SD‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‬
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺘﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻜﺔ ً‬
‫ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺧﻞ ً‬
‫ﻳﺴﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻴﺌﺎ ً‬
‫ﺍﺟﺬﺏ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٠‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:33:51 AM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab83-107.indd 90‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻗﺮﺏ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻱ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪-‬ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻠﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ ،DVD‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻟﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪﻫﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺴﻮء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺑﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Samsung‬ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺴﻮء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD/MMC‬ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ‪٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD/MMC‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ‪ 16:9‬ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) 4:3‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ JPEG‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ MPEG4‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺭﻗﻤﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺗﺨﺼﺺ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻹﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ًء ﻣﻦ ‪ DCAM0001‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﻛﻞ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ًء ﻣﻦ ‪ 100SSDVC‬ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪.(DCF‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺎ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳُﻌﺪ ‪ DCF‬ﺗﻨﻴﺴﻖ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.DCF‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.JPEG‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﻮ ‪.٦٠٠x٨٠٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.MPEG4‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﻮ ‪.٥٧٦X٧٢٠‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:33:52 AM‬‬
‫>ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ<‬
‫>ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ<‬
‫‪00-0000‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ‬
‫>ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ<‬
‫‪٩١‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab83-107.indd 91‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [DISC‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[CARD‬‬
‫)‪.[(Player‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‪ ،[DISC‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫)‪.[(Camera‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‪ ،[CARD‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Memory‬ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Photo Quality‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ )‪) Super Fine‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪) Fine‬ﺟﻴﺪ( ﺃﻭ ‪) Normal‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ((‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪►Super Fine‬‬
‫‪►Series‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪Super Fine‬‬
‫‪Fine‬‬
‫‪Normal‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫>‪) <Super Fine‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ(‬
‫>‪) <Fine‬ﺟﻴﺪ(‬
‫>‪) <Normal‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪ ١٢٨‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ٦٠٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٧٩٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ١٢٧٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٢٥٦‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ١٢٠٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ١٥٨٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٢٥٤٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٥١٢‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ٢٤٠٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٣١٥٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٥٠٧٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ٤٩٦٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٦٥٢٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ١٠٤٩٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ٩٧٤٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ١٢٨٠٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٢٠٠٠٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪Move OK Select‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪M.Cam Mode‬‬
‫‪►Memory‬‬
‫‪Photo Quality‬‬
‫‪File No.‬‬
‫‪M.Cam Mode‬‬
‫‪►Memory‬‬
‫‪Photo Quality‬‬
‫‪File No.‬‬
‫‪Move OK Select‬‬
‫‪790‬‬
‫‪8 min‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ‪.٦٠٠ × ٨٠٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ .[QUICK MENU‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٧‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٢٠٠٠٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ )‪ (JPEG‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٢‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:33:52 AM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab83-107.indd 92‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ >‪) <Series‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ(‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ً‬‫ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ >‪) <Reset‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ(‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪.0001‬‬‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[CARD‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪►Super Fine‬‬
‫‪►Series‬‬
‫)‪.[(Camera‬‬
‫‪M.Cam Mode‬‬
‫‪►Memory‬‬
‫‪Photo Quality‬‬
‫‪File No.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Memory‬ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <File No.‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )‪) Series‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ( ﺃﻭ ‪) Reset‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ((‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪Move OK Select‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪Series‬‬
‫‪Reset‬‬
‫‪M.Cam Mode‬‬
‫‪►Memory‬‬
‫‪Photo Quality‬‬
‫‪File No.‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪Move OK Select‬‬
‫‪٩٣‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:33:53 AM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab83-107.indd 93‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ )‪ (JPEG‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ً‬
‫ﻣﻘﻔﻼ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[CARD‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫)‪.[(Camera‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﻲء ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺗﻤﻬﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [PHOTO‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻀﻮﻥ ٍ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ >‪) <Photo capture‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻗﻪ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ ﻋﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.٦٠٠×٨٠٠‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪Photo capture‬‬
‫‪٩٤‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:33:53 AM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab83-107.indd 94‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ )‪(JPEG‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[CARD‬‬
‫‪Photo‬‬
‫)‪.[(Player‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫>!‪) <No file‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ!(‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[‬‬
‫‪100-0001‬‬
‫]‪[1/10‬‬
‫‪Next Page‬‬
‫‪Previous Page‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ]‪ [/‬ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [‬ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ])‬
‫‪.[(MULTI DISP.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٥‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:33:54 AM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab83-107.indd 95‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ])‪(S.SHOW‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻌﻴًﺎ ﺑﺰﻣﻦ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪) <Slide‬ﺍﻧﺰﻻﻕ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ "ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ" ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ًء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ])‪(S.SHOW‬‬
‫‪5/10‬‬
‫‪Slide‬‬
‫‪100-0005‬‬
‫‪٩٦‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:33:55 AM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab83-107.indd 96‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ )ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺤﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[CARD‬‬
‫)‪.[(Player‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫>!‪) <No file‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ!(‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪Photo‬‬
‫‪100-0001‬‬
‫]‪[1/10‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Memory‬ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪Next Page‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Protect‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ) ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ .[QUICK MENU‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٧‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ) ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪On‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪Previous Page‬‬
‫‪M.Player Mode‬‬
‫‪►Memory‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫‪Delete All‬‬
‫‪Protect‬‬
‫‪Print Mark‬‬
‫‪Format‬‬
‫‪Move OK Select‬‬
‫‪Photo‬‬
‫‪100-0001‬‬
‫]‪[1/10‬‬
‫‪Next Page‬‬
‫‪Previous Page‬‬
‫‪٩٧‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:33:56 AM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab83-107.indd 97‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺣﺬﻑ(‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﺰﻣﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[CARD‬‬
‫)‪.[(Player‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫>!‪) <No file‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ!(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Memory‬ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Delete‬ﺣﺬﻑ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ >?‪) <Delete‬ﺣﺬﻑ؟( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪ ،<Yes‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ .[QUICK MENU‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٧‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻧﺘﺞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪١٠٠‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٩٧‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪Photo‬‬
‫‪100-0001‬‬
‫]‪[1/10‬‬
‫‪Next Page‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪Previous Page‬‬
‫‪M.Player Mode‬‬
‫‪►Memory‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫‪Delete All‬‬
‫‪Protect‬‬
‫‪Print Mark‬‬
‫‪Format‬‬
‫‪Move OK Select MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪Photo‬‬
‫‪100-0001‬‬
‫]‪[1/10‬‬
‫?‪Delete‬‬
‫‪No‬‬
‫‪Next Page‬‬
‫‪Yes‬‬
‫‪Previous Page‬‬
‫‪٩٨‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:33:57 AM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab83-107.indd 98‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪.٩٨‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Delete All‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ >?‪) <Delete all‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ؟( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪M.Player Mode‬‬
‫‪►Memory‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫‪Delete All‬‬
‫‪Protect‬‬
‫‪Print Mark‬‬
‫‪Format‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪ <Yes‬ﺃﻭ>‪) <No‬ﻻ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ .[QUICK MENU‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٧‬‬
‫ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ً‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪١٠٠‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪Move OK Select‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪Photo‬‬
‫‪100-0001‬‬
‫]‪[1/10‬‬
‫?‪Delete all‬‬
‫‪No‬‬
‫‪Next Page‬‬
‫‪Yes‬‬
‫‪Previous Page‬‬
‫‪٩٩‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:33:58 AM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab83-107.indd 99‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗُﻌﻴﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[CARD‬‬
‫)‪.[(Player‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫>!‪) <No file‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ!(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺣﺮﻙ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪> <Memory‬ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ<‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪> <Format‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ<‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ >!‪) <Format? All files will be deleted‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ؟ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ!( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪ ،<Yes‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ >!‪) <Complete‬ﺗﻢ!( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ .[QUICK MENU‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٧‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٩٠‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻬﻴﺄ! ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻬﻴﺄﺓ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:33:59 AM‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪►Off‬‬
‫‪►All Off‬‬
‫‪M.Player Mode‬‬
‫‪►Memory‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫‪Delete All‬‬
‫‪Protect‬‬
‫‪Print Mark‬‬
‫‪Format‬‬
‫‪Move OK Select MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪M.Player Mode‬‬
‫‪►Memory‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫‪Delete All‬‬
‫‪Protect‬‬
‫‪Print Mark‬‬
‫‪Format‬‬
‫‪Move OK Select MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪Photo‬‬
‫‪100-0001‬‬
‫]‪[1/10‬‬
‫?‪Format‬‬
‫!‪All files will be deleted‬‬
‫‪Yes‬‬
‫‪No‬‬
‫‪Next Page‬‬
‫‪Previous Page‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab83-107.indd 100‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ )‪ (MPEG‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ‪.٧٢٠×٥٧٦‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[CARD‬‬
‫)‪.[(Camera‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ ،[Start/Stop‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.MPEG4‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ً [PHOTO‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ .[Start/Stop‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٩٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [Start/Stop‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٢٨‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٢٥٦‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ١٦‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٥١٢‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ٣٢‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ٦٤‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ١٢٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪REC  0:00:30‬‬
‫‪16 min‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺪﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ‪ ١٦‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ )ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ (avi 1.0) *.avi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﺣﺠﻤًﺎ ﻭﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺠﺴﻤًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ :‬ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎء‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ،AE‬ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‪.Color Nite ،‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺑﺎﺕ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:34:00 AM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab83-107.indd 101‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ )‪ (MPEG‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[CARD‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫)‪.[(Player‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫>!‪) <No file‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ!(ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ) (‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ) (‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[‬‬
‫[‪ [/] ،‬ﻭ ]‪.[(Stop)‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ]‬
‫‪Movie‬‬
‫‪100-0001‬‬
‫]‪[1/10‬‬
‫‪Next Page‬‬
‫‪Previous Page‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [QUICK MENU‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻴﺒًﺎ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻫﺬﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪) Video Codec‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.(DVD‬‬
‫ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Microsoft Windows Media Player‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٩‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬‫ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ‪ Microsoft Windows Media Player‬ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﺎﻳﻜﺮﻭﺳﻮﻓﺖ‪،‬‬‫"‪."http://www.microsoft.com/windows/windowsmedia/download/default.asp‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪.Macintosh‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:34:01 AM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab83-107.indd 102‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪DVD‬‬
‫‪1DVD-RW/+RW/-R/+R DL1‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [PHOTO‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ ،DVD‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ DVD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[DISC‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫]‪[1/9‬‬
‫)‪.[(Player‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪ [Joystick(OK‬ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[PHOTO‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻗﻪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭﺍ(‬
‫)ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ً‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪Next Page‬‬
‫‪Previous Page‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.٤٨٠x٦٤٠‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪-RW‬‬
‫‪ SP 0:00:01‬‬
‫‪VR‬‬
‫‪001‬‬
‫‪Photo capture‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:34:02 AM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab83-107.indd 103‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪.(Digital Print Order Format) DPOF‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺁﻟﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.DPOF‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ >‪) <This File‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪.999‬‬
‫‪) <All Files> -‬ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ(‪ :‬ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[CARD‬‬
‫)‪.[(Player‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ >!‪) <No file‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ!( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Memory‬ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Print Mark‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ) ‪) All Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ( ﺃﻭ ‪) All Files‬ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪) This File‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ((‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <This File‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ) ( ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫‪.٩‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:34:03 AM‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪Photo‬‬
‫‪100-0001‬‬
‫]‪[1/10‬‬
‫‪Next Page‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪All Off‬‬
‫‪All Files‬‬
‫‪This File 005‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪Previous Page‬‬
‫‪M.Player Mode‬‬
‫‪►Memory‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫‪Delete All‬‬
‫‪Protect‬‬
‫‪Print Mark‬‬
‫‪Format‬‬
‫‪Move OK Select‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪Photo‬‬
‫‪100-0001‬‬
‫]‪[1/10‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪Next Page‬‬
‫‪Previous Page‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab83-107.indd 104‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ >‪) <All Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ >‪) <This File‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ( ﻋﻠﻰ>‪.<000‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ]‪ .[QUICK MENU‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٧‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨُﺴﺦ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ‪ 000‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.999‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨُﺴﺦ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.1‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ DPOF‬ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:34:03 AM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab83-107.indd 105‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫™‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) PictBridge‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﻙ ‪ -‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ™‪PictBridge‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Pict Bridge‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ ،PictBridge‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﻋﻢ ‪ ،PictBridge‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫‪ ،PictBridge‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ‪ PictBridge‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪(USB‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[CARD‬‬
‫‪►On‬‬
‫‪►On‬‬
‫‪►Computer‬‬
‫‪►English‬‬
‫)‪.[(Player‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺣﺮﻙ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <System‬ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Printer‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪) <Computer> ‬ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ(‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪) <Printer> ‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ )ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ >‪ ،<Pict Bridge‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪Move OK Select‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <USB Connect‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ ،(USB‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪Computer‬‬
‫‪Printer‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪M.Player Mode‬‬
‫‪►System‬‬
‫‪Clock Set‬‬
‫‪Remote‬‬
‫‪Beep Sound‬‬
‫‪USB Connect‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪Move OK Select‬‬
‫‪5/10‬‬
‫‪M.Player Mode‬‬
‫‪►Pict Bridge‬‬
‫‪Print‬‬
‫‪Copies‬‬
‫‪Date/Time‬‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ >‪ <Pict Bridge‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻈﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ >‪) <Print‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪Next‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:34:04 AM‬‬
‫‪M.Player Mode‬‬
‫‪►System‬‬
‫‪Clock Set‬‬
‫‪Remote‬‬
‫‪Beep Sound‬‬
‫‪USB Connect‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪Previous‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab83-107.indd 106‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫™‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) PictBridge‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Copies‬ﻧﺴﺦ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Date/Time‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ >‪) <Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪) <Date> ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‪) <Time> ،‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‬
‫ﻭ>‪) <Date&Time‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪5/10‬‬
‫‪M.Player Mode‬‬
‫‪►Pict Bridge‬‬
‫‪Print‬‬
‫‪Copies‬‬
‫‪Date/Time‬‬
‫‪001‬‬
‫‪Next‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪Previous‬‬
‫‪5/10‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <Print‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪،[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ >‪) <Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪Date‬‬
‫‪Time‬‬
‫‪Date&Time‬‬
‫‪Next‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪M.Player Mode‬‬
‫‪►Pict Bridge‬‬
‫‪Print‬‬
‫‪Copies‬‬
‫‪Date/Time‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪Previous‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣُﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻭﺗُﻌﺪ ™‪ PictBridge‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪،(Camera & Imaging Products Association) CIPA‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ‪ ،Seiko Epson ،Olympus ،HP ،Fuji ،Canon‬ﻭ‪.Sony‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪ PictBridge‬ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.PictBridge‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪6/14/2006 10:34:04 AM‬‬
‫‪00993J-RainBow-arab83-107.indd 107‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) USB‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ‪ USB 1.1‬ﻭ‪) .2.0‬ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﺰﻣﻚ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ )‪ (DV Driver, Video Codec, DirectX 9.0‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒَﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ )‪.Microsoft (Windows‬‬
‫‪Full Speed USB - Windows 98SE/ME ‬‬
‫‪ High speed USB - Windows 2000 ‬ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ‪ Service Pack 4‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ High speed USB - Windows XP ‬ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ‪ Service Pack 1‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪Windows‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‬
‫™‪Intel® Pentium III‬‬
‫™‪Intel® Pentium 4‬‬
‫‪Windows® 98SE/ME‬‬
‫‪Windows® 2000/XP‬‬
‫‪ ١٢٨‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ٥١٢‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫‪ ٧٦٨ x ١٠٢٤‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‪ ٢٤ ،‬ﺑﺖ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪USB1.1‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫‪ ٧٦٨ x ١٠٢٤‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‪ ٢٤ ،‬ﺑﺖ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪USB2.0 High Speed‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﻣﺎﻛﻨﺘﻮﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻧﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٨‬‬
‫‪7/25/2006 4:03:09 PM‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab108-132.indd 108‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) USB‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺳﻴﺌﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺨﻄﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻌﺪ ™‪ Intel® Pentium III‬ﺃﻭ ™‪ Pentium 4‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Intel Corporation‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻌﺪ ®‪ Windows‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Microsoft® Corporation‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻬﻲ ﻣﻠﻚ ﻷﺻﺤﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ .USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻛﻘﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ‪ USB Streaming‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ‪ Video Codec‬ﻭ‪ DV Driver‬ﻭ‪.DirectX 9.0‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﺼﻠﺖ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ USB HUB‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ USB‬ﺛﻢ ﺟﺮﺏ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٩‬‬
‫‪7/25/2006 4:03:09 PM‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab108-132.indd 109‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) USB‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪) USB‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪(USB‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[CARD‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫)‪.[(Player‬‬
‫‪►On‬‬
‫‪►On‬‬
‫‪►Computer‬‬
‫‪►English‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺣﺮﻙ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <System‬ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <USB Connect‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ ،(USB‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ]‪ [Joystick‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪> <Computer‬ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ< ﺃﻭ >‪) <Printer‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪.[Joystick(OK‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪) <Computer‬ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ( ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻛﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪USB Stream‬‬
‫‪ PC Camera،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪) <Printer‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ( ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪ .Pictbridge‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪١٠٦‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪Move OK Select‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪Computer‬‬
‫‪Printer‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪M.Player Mode‬‬
‫‪►System‬‬
‫‪Clock Set‬‬
‫‪Remote‬‬
‫‪Beep Sound‬‬
‫‪USB Connect‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪M.Player Mode‬‬
‫‪►System‬‬
‫‪Clock Set‬‬
‫‪Remote‬‬
‫‪Beep Sound‬‬
‫‪USB Connect‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪Move OK Select‬‬
‫‪١١٠‬‬
‫‪7/25/2006 4:03:09 PM‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab108-132.indd 110‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) USB‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ‪DV Media PRO‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ DV Media Pro‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ!‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ "‪) Start‬ﺑﺪء(" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫"‪) Run‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(" ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ "‪ "D:\autorun.exe‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻄﻪ ﻟﻴﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫"‪."D:Drive‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪DV Driver and DirectX 9.0 -‬‬
‫‪ DV Driver ‬ﻫﻮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ >‪ <DV Driver‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ‪) USB Removable‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪(Windows 98 SE‬‬‫ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪USB PC-CAMERA‬‬‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ >‪ <Confirm‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows 98 SE‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.Windows‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ >‪ ،<DirectX 9.0‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ >‪.<DV Driver‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ >‪ ،<DirectX 9.0‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ >‪ <DirectX 9.0‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪Video Codec -‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ >‪ <Video Codec‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ >‪ <Video Codec‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١١‬‬
‫‪7/25/2006 4:03:09 PM‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab108-132.indd 111‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) USB‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ – ‪Photo Express‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ >‪ <Photo Express‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ – ‪Quick Time‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ >‪ <Quick Time‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ QuickTime‬ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ‪ Apple‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ )ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٣٦٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺐ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﻨﺎ ﻻ ﻧﻀﻤﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪.Photo Express‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪Video Codec - DirectX 9.0 - DV Driver :‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪.DV Driver‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ DV Driver‬ﻭ ‪ Video Codec‬ﻭ‪ DirectX 9.0‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ DV Media Pro‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻝ "‪) Digital Signature not found‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ(" ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٢‬‬
‫‪7/25/2006 4:03:10 PM‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab108-132.indd 112‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) USB‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫)ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪(USB‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ ،[Power‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ ،[Mode‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ ]‪ [Zoom‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫"‪) Eject‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ("‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ "‪) Confirm‬ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ(" ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.Windows Splash‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪ USB HUB‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ USB‬ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ .USB‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪١١٠‬‬
‫‪١١٣‬‬
‫‪7/25/2006 4:03:10 PM‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab108-132.indd 113‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) USB‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻻﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ‪ Video Codec ،DV Driver‬ﻭ‪ DirectX 9.0‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﻛﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺩﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻟﻤﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺆﺗﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ ،(Net Meeting‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺆﺗﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺆﺗﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻣﻊ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Net Meeting‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻫﻮ ‪ً ١٢٫٥‬‬
‫ ‪ (VGA) ٤٨٠×٦٤٠‬ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪.USB 2.0‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ ،[Power‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ ،[Mode‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ ]‪ [Zoom‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[DISC‬‬
‫)‪.[(Camera‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١١٤‬‬
‫‪7/25/2006 4:03:11 PM‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab108-132.indd 114‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i)) USB‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ٍ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ ،USB‬ﻻﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ‪ Video Codec ،DV Driver‬ﻭ‪ DirectX 9.0‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺨﺰﻧﻪ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﻠﻒ "‪ "avi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Windows Movie Maker‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ Windows Movie Maker‬ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ‪ Windows ME‬ﻭ‪(C:\program files\Movie maker\moviemk.exe) .XP‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[CARD‬ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫)‪ [(Camera‬ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫)‪.[(Player‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ‪ Windows Explorer‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٥‬‬
‫‪7/25/2006 4:03:12 PM‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab108-132.indd 115‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺟﻬﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻭﺗﺮﺩﺩ ‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺗﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻨﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ‪/‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ (VCR)/DVD‬ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ PAL‬ﻭﺃﻥ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.(NTSC-PAL‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺩ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪PAL‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﺠﻴﻜﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻐﺎﺭﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻣﻨﻮﻟﺚ‪ ،‬ﺟﻤﻬﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻴﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻧﻤﺎﺭﻙ‪ ،‬ﻣﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻨﻠﻨﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﻤﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻧﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻳﻄﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻈﻤﻰ‪ ،‬ﻫﻮﻟﻨﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻫﻮﻧﺞ ﻛﻮﻧﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﺒﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺭﻳﺸﻴﻮﺱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﺮﻭﻳﺞ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻣﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻨﻐﺎﻓﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺟﻤﻬﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻓﺎﻙ‪ ،‬ﺇﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻳﺴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺭﻳﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻼﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻧﺲ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺩ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪NTSC‬‬
‫ﺟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻫﺎﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﻨﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻛﻮﺭﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺴﻴﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺒﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻳﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٦‬‬
‫‪7/25/2006 4:03:12 PM‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab108-132.indd 116‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ ،Samsung‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻓﻲ >‪) <Camera/Player‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫?‬
‫‪error‬‬
‫!‪) No disc‬ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻗﺮﺹ!(‬
‫!‪) Disc full‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺊ!(‬
‫ﻭﻣﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺑﻄﻲء‬
‫ﺑﻄﻲء‬
‫ﺑﻄﻲء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻰ‪...‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫!‪) Bad Disc‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺗﺎﻟﻒ!(‬
‫ﺑﻄﻲء‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ DVD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫!‪) Finalized disc‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺅﻩ!(‬
‫ﺑﻄﻲء‬
‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺻﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ً‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﺂﺧﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺻﺎ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ً‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ )‪(DVD-RW/+RW‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ ،DVD-RW‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫!‪) Cover is opened‬ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ!(‬
‫ﺑﻄﻲء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﻟﻠﻨﺪﻯ‪ ،‬ﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺟﺎﻧﺒًﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﺑﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺪﻯ؟‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺪﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅ ﻋﻦ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻤﻌﻨﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺪﻯ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻳﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺪﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﻭﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺪﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻪ؟‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺟﺎﻑ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻰ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺪﻯ؟‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺭ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻘﺲ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺘﺎء ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻐﻠﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﻃﻘﺲ ﺣﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﺎء ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻐﻠﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻜﻴﻒ ﻫﻮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٧‬‬
‫‪7/25/2006 4:03:13 PM‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab108-132.indd 117‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ /‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻭﻣﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺑﻄﻲء ) ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ(‬
‫ ) ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ (‬‫ﺑﻄﻲء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫!‪No memory card‬‬
‫)ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ!(‬
‫!‪Memory card full‬‬
‫)ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ(‬
‫‪ Memory cord read error‬ﺑﻄﻲء‬
‫)ﺧﻄﺄ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ(‬
‫‪ Memory cord write error‬ﺑﻄﻲء‬
‫)ﺧﻄﺄ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ(‬
‫!‪) Not formatted‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻬﻴﺄ!( ﺑﻄﻲء‬
‫!‪) No file‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ!(‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻰ‪...‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ DVD‬ﻫﺬﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪١٠٠‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺳﺠﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٨‬‬
‫‪7/25/2006 4:03:13 PM‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab108-132.indd 118‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Samsung‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌَﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ STBY‬ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺩﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻠﻖ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺁﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ ،DVD‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪.[Start/Stop‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺰﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻮ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﻔﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻧﻔﺪﺕ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺍ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺗﺤﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪" BLC‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ" ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﺩﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪  .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺄﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫"ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ" ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ "ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ ‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪DC‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻼ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٩‬‬
‫‪7/25/2006 4:03:13 PM‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab108-132.indd 119‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌَﺮﺽ‬
‫)‪.[(Camera‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﺪﻳ ًﺪﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [Start/Stop‬ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ‪ ‬ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ً‬
‫ﺑﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻼ ﻟﻠﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺒﺮﺩ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺗﺎﻟﻒ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﺪﻳ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [Power‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬًﺎ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪.DVD‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﻴﺪ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻫﺬﻩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪.[(Player‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺮﺗﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫‪١٢٠‬‬
‫‪7/25/2006 4:03:13 PM‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab108-132.indd 120‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌَﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻔﺖ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ( ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﻴﺪ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻫﺬﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) VR‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫>‪ <DVD-RW/+RW/-R/+R DL‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) VR‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ‪DVD-RW/+RW/-‬‬
‫‪ R/+R DL‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ )ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ‪.(DVD+RW‬‬
‫ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [OPEN‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﺮﺗﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﺘﺢ‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ( ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻤﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ .DVD‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﻬﺎءﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﺸﺎﺑﻜﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﻟﻴﺲ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢١‬‬
‫‪7/25/2006 4:03:13 PM‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab108-132.indd 121‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫‪) Camera‬ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫‪) Record‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫*‪) Memory‬ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ*(‬
‫‪Disc Manager‬‬
‫)ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ(‬
‫‪) Display‬ﻋﺮﺽ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪) Program AE‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪(AE‬‬
‫‪) White Balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫‪) Digital Effect‬ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ(‬
‫‪) Wide 16:9‬ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ‪(16:9‬‬
‫‪) DIS‬ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ(‬
‫‪) Digital Zoom‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ(‬
‫‪) Rec Mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪) AV In/Out‬ﺧﺮﺝ‪/‬ﺩﺧﻞ ‪ ( AV‬‬
‫‪) Wind Cut‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪) Program AE‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪(AE‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪) White Balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) Wide 16:9‬ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ‪(16:9‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪) Digital Image Stabilizing‬ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ(‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪) Digital Zoom‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺧﻞ‪/‬ﺧﺮﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ‪-‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺢ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪) Image Quality‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫‪) Photo Quality‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪) Delete‬ﺣﺬﻑ(‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪) Delete All‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ(‬
‫ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪) Protect‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫‪) Print Mark‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪) Format‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ(‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪) File No.‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫‪) Disc Finalize‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ(‬
‫‪) Disc Unfinalize‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ( ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫‪) Disc Format‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫‪) Disc Info‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ(‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫‪) LCD Bright‬ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ‪(LCD‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫‪) LCD Colour‬ﻟﻮﻥ ‪(LCD‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫‪) Date/Time‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫*‪M.Player‬‬
‫*‪M.Cam‬‬
‫‪Player‬‬
‫‪Camera‬‬
‫‪Mode‬‬
‫‪Mode‬‬
‫‪Mode‬‬
‫‪Mode‬‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ( )ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ( )ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ(‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪٥٣‬‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫‪٥٧‬‬
‫‪٥٩‬‬
‫‪٦٠‬‬
‫‪٦١‬‬
‫‪٤٢‬‬
‫‪٨٥‬‬
‫‪٥٠‬‬
‫‪٩٢‬‬
‫‪٩٨‬‬
‫‪٩٩‬‬
‫‪٩٧‬‬
‫‪١٠٤‬‬
‫‪١٠٠‬‬
‫‪٩٣‬‬
‫‪٨٢‬‬
‫‪٨٤‬‬
‫‪٨١‬‬
‫‪٧٩‬‬
‫‪٣٦‬‬
‫‪٣٦‬‬
‫‪٣٧‬‬
‫‪ VP-DC161i/DC161Wi/DC161WBi/DC163i/DC165Wi/DC165WBi :‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫* ‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i) :‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪١٢٢‬‬
‫‪7/25/2006 4:03:14 PM‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab108-132.indd 122‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫‪) System‬ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫‪) Clock Set‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪) Remote‬ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ(‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫‪) Beep Sound‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺭﻧﺔ(‬
‫*‪) Shutter Sound‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ( ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫*‪) USB Connect‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ (USB‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪) Demonstration‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ( ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫*‪M.Player* M.Cam‬‬
‫‪Player‬‬
‫‪Camera‬‬
‫‪Mode‬‬
‫‪Mode‬‬
‫‪Mode‬‬
‫‪Mode‬‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫) ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫) ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ(‬
‫ﺑﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫‪٣١‬‬
‫‪٣٢‬‬
‫‪٣٣‬‬
‫‪١١٠‬‬
‫‪٣٤‬‬
‫‪٣٥‬‬
‫‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i) :‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫* ‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i) :‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫" ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Sony Corporation‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗُﻌﺪ "‪ "Memory Stick‬ﻭ "‬
‫‪ ‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺘﻴﻦ "™" ﻭ" ® " ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﻨﻌﻪ ﺑﺘﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﻭﻟﺒﻰ‪.‬‬
‫"ﺩﻭﻟﺒﻰ" ﻭﻋﻼﻣﻪ ‪ - D‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺟﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﻪ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﻭﻟﺒﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٣‬‬
‫‪7/25/2006 4:03:14 PM‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab108-132.indd 123‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‪VP-DC161(i)/DC161W(i)/DC161WB(i)/DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i) :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻠﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪/‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫‪PAL‬‬
‫‪MPEG-2‬‬
‫‪DOLBY® DIGITAL STEREO CREATOR‬‬
‫‪) XP‬ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٩‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺖ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‪) SP ،‬ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٦‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺖ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‪) LP ،‬ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٣‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺖ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪) CCD‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻘﺘﺮﻥ ﺷﺤﻦ( )‪ ٨٠٠‬ﻙ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪)F1.6 33x‬ﺑﺼﺮﻱ(‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ١٫٦‬ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٣٣‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭ‪ ١٢٠٠‬ﻣﺮﺓ )ﺭﻗﻤﻲ(‬
‫‪Ø30‬‬
‫)‪ ٢٫٥ :VP-DC161(i)/DC163(i‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ‪١١٢‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ‬
‫)‪ ٢٫٥ :VP-DC161W(i)/DC161WB(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ‪ ٢٣٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ‬
‫‪TFT LCD‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻣﻠﻮﻧﺔ‬
‫‪ ٧٥) 1Vp-p‬ﺃﻭﻡ ﻃﺮﻓﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪ ٧٥ ،١Vp-p :Y‬ﺃﻭﻡ‪ ٧٥ ،286Vp-p .٠ :C ،‬ﺃﻭﻡ‬
‫‪ ٧٫٥‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ )‪ ٦٠٠‬ﺃﻭﻡ ﻃﺮﻓﻴﺔ(‬‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪Mini-B‬‬
‫‪ Ø3.5‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺠﺴﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪ ٨٫٤‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ‪ ٧٫٤‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ )‪ ١٠٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ~‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ( ‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ ٥٫٢‬ﻭﺍﺕ ))‪/LCD ،VP-DC161(i)/DC163(i‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪ ٥٫٤‬ﻭﺍﺕ ))‪/LCD ،VP-DC161W(i)/DC161WB(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬
‫‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )‪ ٣٢‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠٤‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٢٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )‪ ٤-‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ ٥١٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ )‪ ٢٫٠٢‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ ٨٧٫٤‬ﻣﻠﻢ )‪ ٣٫٤٤‬ﺑﻮﺻﺎﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ‪ ٢١٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ )‪ ٤٫٧٨‬ﺑﻮﺻﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٤٢٥‬ﺟﺮﺍﻣًﺎ )‪ ٠٫٩٣٦‬ﺭﻃﻞ‪ ١٥٫١٧ ،‬ﺃﻭﻧﺺ( )ﻋﺪﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻣﺠﺴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺮﺍ )‪ ٤٩‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ( ) ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ(‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻲ‪ :‬ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٥‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ )‪ ١٦٫٤‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ( )ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ(‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ))‪ VP-DC163(i)/DC165W(i)/DC165WB(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ً ١٥‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﺎﺕ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٤‬‬
‫‪7/25/2006 4:03:15 PM‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab108-132.indd 124‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪-A-‬‬
‫‪) Add‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ( ‪٧٢ ..........................................‬‬
‫‪) AV In/Out‬ﺧﺮﺝ‪/‬ﺩﺧﻞ ‪٨٥ .......................(AV‬‬
‫‪-B-‬‬
‫‪) Beep Sound‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺭﻧﺔ( ‪٣٢ .......................‬‬
‫‪) BLC‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ( ‪٤٧ .....................‬‬
‫‪-C-‬‬
‫‪) Clock Set‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ( ‪٣٠ .........................‬‬
‫‪٤٨ .......................................... Color Nite‬‬
‫‪-D-‬‬
‫‪) Date/Time‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( ‪٣٧ .......................‬‬
‫‪) Delete‬ﺣﺬﻑ( ‪٧٦ .......................................‬‬
‫‪) Demonstration‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ( ‪٣٥ ............‬‬
‫‪) Digital Effect‬ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ( ‪٥٧ ......................‬‬
‫‪) Digital Zoom‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ( ‪٦١ ......................‬‬
‫‪) DIS‬ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ (‪٦٠ .........................‬‬
‫‪-E-‬‬
‫‪) Exposure‬ﻋﺮﺽ( ‪٥١ ................................‬‬
‫‪-F-‬‬
‫‪-‬ﺥ‪-‬‬
‫‪) Print Mark‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ( ‪١٠٤.......................‬‬
‫‪) Program AE‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪٥٣ ...................... (AE‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪٢٩ ،٢٨.....................................‬‬
‫‪) Remote‬ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ( ‪٣١ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ‪١٩ .................................................‬‬
‫‪) Shutter Sound‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ( ‪٣٣ .................‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ‪٥١ ............................................‬‬
‫‪) Thumbnail index‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ( ‪٦٢ ....‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪٣٦ .............................................LCD‬‬
‫‪) Unfinalize‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء( ‪٨٤ ............................‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ‪٩٥ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪١٠١.........................................‬‬
‫‪-R‬‬‫‪-S‬‬‫‪-T-‬‬
‫‪-U-‬‬
‫‪-W-‬‬
‫‪-‬ﺭ‪-‬‬
‫ﺱ‪-‬‬‫‪-‬ﺵ‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬ﺹ‪-‬‬
‫‪) White Balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ( ‪٥٥ ...............‬‬
‫‪) Wind Cut‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ( ‪٥٠ ...........................‬‬
‫‪-‬ﺽ‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪٨٥ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪١٥ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪٨٠ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪١٠ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪٢٦ .........................................‬‬
‫‪-‬ﻕ‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬ﺃ‪-‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺁﻟﻴًﺎ‪/‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪٥٢ ......................‬‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪٤٩ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ‪٢٧ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪٢٦ ............................................‬‬
‫‪-‬ﻝ‪-‬‬
‫‪) Fade‬ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎء( ‪٤٦ ........................................‬‬
‫‪) File No.‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‪٩٣ ................................‬‬
‫‪) Finalize‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء(‪٨٢ ......................................‬‬
‫‪) Format‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ( ‪١٠٠ ،٨١ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‪٢١ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪٩٠ ............................................‬‬
‫‪٩٠ ..................................... Memory Stick‬‬
‫‪) Move‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ( ‪٧٤ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ‪٤٥ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪٧ ............................................‬‬
‫‪) Partial Delete‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ( ‪٧٧ ،٦٨...............‬‬
‫‪) PB ZOOM‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪٦٦ ........................... (PB‬‬
‫‪) Photo Quality‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ( ‪٩٢ .................‬‬
‫‪١٠٦......................................... PictBridge‬‬
‫‪) Playlist‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪٦٢ .............................‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪١٨ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ‪٨٩ ،٨٨...............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ‪٩٨ ،٧١ ،٦٧........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪٩٧ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ‪١١٥~١٠٨ .................................. USB‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪٤٤ .......................................EASY.Q‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪٤٢ ...........................................‬‬
‫‪١٢٥‬‬
‫‪-M‬‬‫‪-P-‬‬
‫‪7/25/2006 4:03:15 PM‬‬
‫ﺏ‪-‬‬‫ﺕ‪-‬‬‫ﺝ‪-‬‬‫‪-‬ﺡ‪-‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪٣٤ .....................................‬‬
‫‪-‬ﻡ‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪٣٨ .......................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ‪٢٥ ..................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪٧٩ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‪١٣ .................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪٤٥ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﻥ‪-‬‬‫‪-‬ﻭ‪-‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab108-132.indd 125‬‬
00993N-RainBow-arab108-132.indd 126
7/25/2006 4:03:15 PM
AR
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻔﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ‬
.‫ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ‬،‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ‬
Region Country
North America
Latin America
Europe
CIS
Customer
CANADA
MEXICO
U.S.A
ARGENTINE
BRAZIL
CHILE
COSTA RICA
ECUADOR
EL SALVADOR
GUATEMALA
JAMAICA
PANAMA
PUERTO RICO
REP. DOMINICA
TRINIDAD & TOBAGO
VENEZUELA
BELGIUM
CZECH REPUBLIC
DENMARK
FINLAND
FRANCE
GERMANY
HUNGARY
ITALIA
LUXEMBURG
NETHERLANDS
NORWAY
POLAND
PORTUGAL
SLOVAKIA
SPAIN
SWEDEN
U.K
RUSSIA
UKRAINE
AUSTRALIA
CHINA
HONG KONG
INDIA
Asia Pacific
INDONESIA
JAPAN
MALAYSIA
PHILIPPINES
SINGAPORE
THAILAND
Middle East & Africa
00993N-RainBow-arab108-132.indd 127
TAIWAN
VIETNAM
SOUTH AFRICA
U.A.E
Care Certre
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
01-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
0800-333-3733
0800-124-421
800-726-7864(SAMSUNG)
0-800-507-7267
1-800-10-7267
800-6225
1-800-299-0013
1-800-234-7267
800-7267
1-800-682-3180
1-800-751-2676
1-800-7267-864
1-800-100-5303
02 201 2418
844 000 844
38 322 887
09 693 79 554
08 25 08 65 65 (0,15€/Min)
01805 - 121213 (€ 0,12/Min)
06 40 985 985
199 153 153
02 261 03 710
0900 20 200 88 (€ 0.10/Min)
231 627 22
0 801 801 881
80 8 200 128
0850 123 989
902 10 11 30
08 585 367 87
0870 242 0303
8-800-200-0400
8-800-502-0000
1300 362 603
800-810-5858, 010- 6475 1880
2862 6001
3030 8282
1600 1100 11
0800-112-8888
0120-327-527
1800-88-9999
1800-10-SAMSUNG (7267864)
1800-SAMSUNG (7267864)
1800-29-3232
02-689-3232
0800-329-999
1 800 588 889
0860 7267864 (SAMSUNG)
800SAMSUNG (7267864)
Web Site
www.samsung.com/ca
www.samsung.com/mx
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/ar
www.samsung.com/br
www.samsung.com/cl
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/be
www.samsung.com/cz
www.samsung.com/dk
www.samsung.com/fi
www.samsung.com/fr
www.samsung.de
www.samsung.com/hu
www.samsung.com/it
www.samsung.lu
www.samsung.com/nl
www.samsung.com/no
www.samsung.com/pl
www.samsung.com/pt
www.samsung.com/sk
www.samsung.com/es
www.samsung.com/se
www.samsung.com/uk
www.samsung.ru
www.samsung.com/ur
www.samsung.com/au
www.samsung.com.cn
www.samsung.com/hk
www.samsung.com/in
www.samsung.com/id
www.samsung.com/jp
www.samsung.com/my
www.samsung.com/ph
www.samsung.com/sg
www.samsung.com/th
www.samsung.com/tw
www.samsung.com/vn
www.samsung.com/za
www.samsung.com/mea
7/25/2006 4:03:16 PM
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺮﺓ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ )‪(RoHS‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ”ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺮﺓ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ“ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺮﺓ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺩﻣﻴﻮﻡ )‪ (Cd‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺻﺎﺹ )‪ (Pb‬ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺋﺒﻖ‬
‫)‪ (Hg‬ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﻣﻴﻮﻡ ﺳﺪﺍﺳﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻓﺆ )‪ (Cr+6‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻮﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻭﻣﻴﻨﺎﺗﺪ ﺑﻴﻔﻴﻨﻠﺲ )‪ (PBBs‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻮﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻭﻣﻴﻨﺎﺗﺪ ﺑﻴﻔﻴﻨﻞ ﺇﻳﺜﺮ‬
‫)‪ (PBDEs‬ﻓﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺗﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪7/25/2006 4:03:16 PM‬‬
‫‪00993N-RainBow-arab108-132.indd 128‬‬
Related documents
Samsung DC165WB(i) Owner`s manual
Samsung DC165WB(i) Owner`s manual
Garmin 546 GPS Receiver User Manual
Garmin 546 GPS Receiver User Manual
Samsung VP-DC165WI 用戶手冊
Samsung VP-DC165WI 用戶手冊
Samsung VP-DC165WI 用户手册
Samsung VP-DC165WI 用户手册
JVC GVT0298-003B User's Manual
JVC GVT0298-003B User's Manual
Samsung VP-DX10 دليل المستخدم
Samsung VP-DX10 دليل المستخدم
Samsung VP-DX200I دليل المستخدم
Samsung VP-DX200I دليل المستخدم
Samsung VP-DX105 دليل المستخدم
Samsung VP-DX105 دليل المستخدم
Samsung WT12J User Manual
Samsung WT12J User Manual
índice royal & langnickel decoart
índice royal & langnickel decoart
Mobiflex 200-M - Lincoln Electric
Mobiflex 200-M - Lincoln Electric
Samsung VP-MX20 دليل المستخدم
Samsung VP-MX20 دليل المستخدم
"user manual"
"user manual"
Samsung VP-X210L دليل المستخدم
Samsung VP-X210L دليل المستخدم
Samsung VP-HMX10A دليل المستخدم
Samsung VP-HMX10A دليل المستخدم
Samsung VP-D381 Manuel de l'utilisateur
Samsung VP-D381 Manuel de l'utilisateur